manualshive.com logo in svg

Siemens SINAMICS G120XA, Operating Instructions Manual, Page: 853 / 918

Share
Download
Siemens SINAMICS G120XA Operating Instructions Manual Download Page 853

Function description

Removing the fuse
1. Remove 2 screws (torx 25) of the front cover.

7;

7;

1P

2. Remove the front cover.
3. Disconnect the wires.

[PP

[PP

4. Remove the fuse.

The fuse is removed.

❒

Corrective maintenance

10.2 Replacing spare parts

SINAMICS G120XA converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2019, FW V1.0, A5E44751205B AB

851

Summary of Contents for SINAMICS G120XA

Page 1: ...Operating instructions Infrastructure converters for standard pumps fans 03 2019 Edition SINAMICS G120XA SINAMICS www siemens com drives ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... V1 0 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB Fundamental safety instructions 1 Description 2 Mounting 3 Wiring 4 Commissioning 5 Advanced commissioning 6 Parameters 7 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 Warnings faults and system messages 9 Corrective maintenance 10 Technical data 11 Appendix A ...

Page 4: ...hose who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used thes...

Page 5: ... Smart Access 36 2 6 7 Shield connection kit for the Power Module FSD to FSG 36 2 7 Motors and multi motor drives that can be operated 37 3 Mounting 39 3 1 EMC compliant setup of the machine or plant 39 3 1 1 Control cabinet 40 3 1 2 Cables 41 3 1 3 Electromechanical components 43 3 2 Power losses and air cooling requirements 44 3 3 Mounting the converter 45 3 3 1 Basic installation rules 45 3 3 2...

Page 6: ... RS485 interface for the fieldbus 101 5 Commissioning 103 5 1 Commissioning guidelines 103 5 2 Tools 104 5 3 Preparing for commissioning 105 5 3 1 Collecting motor data 105 5 3 2 Forming DC link capacitors 107 5 3 3 Converter factory setting 108 5 4 Quick commissioning using the BOP 2 operator panel 110 5 4 1 Fitting the BOP 2 to the converter 110 5 4 2 Overview of quick commissioning 111 5 4 3 St...

Page 7: ...cify user data of telegram 169 6 2 4 5 USS process data channel PZD 170 6 2 4 6 Telegram monitoring 173 6 2 4 7 USS parameter channel 174 6 2 5 Communication via BACnet MS TP 180 6 2 5 1 BACnet properties 180 6 2 5 2 Activating communication via fieldbus 181 6 2 5 3 Setting the address 182 6 2 5 4 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet 183 6 2 5 5 Supported services and objects 185 6 2 5 ...

Page 8: ...art up for application class Standard Drive Control 286 6 6 3 Encoderless vector control 288 6 6 3 1 Structure of vector control without encoder sensorless 288 6 6 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller 293 6 6 4 Electrically braking the motor 295 6 6 4 1 DC braking 297 6 6 4 2 Compound braking 299 6 6 5 Pulse frequency wobbling 300 6 7 Drive protection 301 6 7 1 Overcurrent protection 301 6 7 2 Conv...

Page 9: ... 729 8 1 4 Safely remove the memory card 730 8 1 5 Message for a memory card that is not inserted 731 8 2 Operator panel 732 8 2 1 Backup using the operator panel 732 8 2 2 Transfer to the converter 732 8 3 Other ways to back up settings 734 8 4 Series commissioning 735 8 5 Write protection 736 8 6 Know how protection 738 8 6 1 Know how protection 738 8 6 2 Extending the exception list for know ho...

Page 10: ... 10 3 3 Firmware downgrade 857 10 3 4 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade 859 11 Technical data 861 11 1 Technical data of inputs and outputs 861 11 2 Load cycles and overload capability 863 11 3 General converter technical data 864 11 4 Technical data dependent on the power 866 11 5 Derating data 867 11 5 1 Current derating as a function of the installation altitude 867 11 5 ...

Page 11: ...r 882 A 3 Manuals and technical support 884 A 3 1 Overview of the manuals 884 A 3 2 Configuring support 884 A 3 3 Product Support 886 Index 887 Table of contents SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 9 ...

Page 12: ...Table of contents SINAMICS G120XA converter 10 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 13: ...ll other dangerous energy sources e g compressed air hydraulic systems or water Switch the energy sources to a safe state 8 Check that the correct drive system is completely locked After you have completed the work restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence WARNING Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance Excessively low short circuit c...

Page 14: ...ble regulations WARNING Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death Only use power supplies that provide SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage output voltages for all connection...

Page 15: ...s injury Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no voltage condition and start work NOTICE Property damage due to loose power connections Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections This can result in damage due to fire device defects or malfunctions Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque Check all power connections a...

Page 16: ...t app only on equipment that has already been switched off NOTICE Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in the IT system the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground If you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line conductors you ...

Page 17: ...devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the manufacturer and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the system machine WARNING Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions Inactive or non adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that may result in serious injury or death Observe the...

Page 18: ...hanged parameter settings As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization machines can malfunction which in turn can lead to injuries or death Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures e g emergency stop or emergency off Fundamental safety instructions 1 1 General safety instructions SINAMICS G120XA converter 16 Operating...

Page 19: ...send electronic components modules or devices in their original packaging or in other suitable materials e g conductive foam rubber of aluminum foil Only touch components modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the following methods Wearing an ESD wrist strap Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring Only place electronic components modules or devi...

Page 20: ...only intended to provide support for typical tasks As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated correctly Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when using installing operating and maintaining the equipment Fundamental safety instructions 1 3 Warranty and liability for application examples SINAMICS G120XA c...

Page 21: ...rk segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented please visit Industrial security https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they become available and that only the latest product ...

Page 22: ...or the installation or machine Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable protection measures e g virus scanners On completion of commissioning check all security related settings Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the Know how p...

Page 23: ...tc can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions caused by for example Component failure Software errors Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification External influences damage 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component failure Influence during electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operation and or environmental co...

Page 24: ...Fundamental safety instructions 1 5 Residual risks of power drive systems SINAMICS G120XA converter 22 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 25: ...n compiled in such a way that it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as efficiently as possible Where it appears useful additional information for entry level personnel has been added The operating instructions also contain information about special applications Since it is assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configu...

Page 26: ...ument contains recommendations relating to third party products Siemens accepts the fundamental suitability of these third party products You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third party products Use of OpenSSL This product contains software developed in the OpenSSL project for use within the OpenSSL toolkit This produc...

Page 27: ...e pluggable RS485 connector for USS Modbus RTU connection One set of shield connection kit for the Power Module available for FSA only One set of shield connection kit for the Control Unit available for FSD to FSG only Compact Installation Instructions in Chinese and English A printed full size drill pattern available for FSD to FSG only which allows the easy drilling of the necessary mounting hol...

Page 28: ...6 5DWHG RXWSXW SRZHU UDPH VL H 5DWHG RXWSXW FXUUHQW DVHG RQ D ORZ RYHUORDG UWLFOH QXPEHU LWK ILOWHU LWKRXW ILOWHU LWKRXW RSHUDWRU SDQHO LWK RSHUDWRU SDQHO 23 LWK RSHUDWRU SDQHO 23 LOWHU 9 9 N N N N N N 6 6 N N N N 6 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Description 2 3 Scope of delivery SINAMICS G120XA converter 26 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 29: ...chuangxin 5th Road Huayuan Industry Development Area Tianjin Hi Tech Industry Park Made in China CE owner 218kg FS 01 Siemens AG Frauenauracher Str 80 DE 91056 Erlangen Refer to user manual http support automation siemens com IP00 Protection class Siemens Electrical Drives Ltd 6 6 6 6 Article number Net weight Product serial number Degree of protection Motor data Description 2 3 Scope of delivery ...

Page 30: ...uirements of Directive 2011 65 EU relating to the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices RoHS European EMC Directive The compliance of the converter with the regulations of the Directive 2014 30 EU has been demonstrated by full compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 Eurasian conformity The converters comply with the requirements of the Russia Belaru...

Page 31: ...ompulsory Certification The converters do not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification CCC Description 2 4 Directives and standards SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 29 ...

Page 32: ...r old device please contact a company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment and dispose of the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use Description 2 5 Device disposal SINAMICS G120XA converter 30 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 33: ...or high short circuit power levels partly to protect the actual converter against excessive harmonic currents and thus against overload and partly to limit line harmonics to the permitted values The harmonic currents are limited by the total inductance comprising the line reactor and mains supply cable inductance Line reactors can be omitted if the mains supply cable inductance is increased suffic...

Page 34: ...Q VXSSO FDEOH LQGXFWDQFH RQQHFWLRQ SRLQW RI WKH WUDQVIRUPHU RQQHFWLRQ SRLQW RI WKH FRQYHUWHU LQH RQYHUWHU 6N OLQH 6N 6WUDQVI 8N WUDQVI In this case the line short circuit power Sk1 at the connection point of the converter is approximately Sk1 Stransf Uk transf Stransf Sk2 line Stransf Transformer rated power Sk2 line Short circuit power of the higher level voltage level Uk transf Relative short ci...

Page 35: ...oning via the parameter specified by the converter manufacturer Activate the output reactor during commissioning according to the electric specifications Note Output reactors are available as optional components for converters of frame sizes FSD FSG and FSH FSJ only Article number Converter frame size Rated power kW Output reactor FSD 18 5 6SL3202 0AE23 8CA0 22 37 6SE6400 3TC07 5ED0 45 6SE6400 3TC...

Page 36: ...ble output frequency is limited to 150 Hz Note Sine wave filters are available as optional components for converters of frame sizes FSD to FSG Article number Converter variants Sine wave filter Frame size Rated power kW Article number FSD 18 5 6SL3202 0AE24 6SA0 22 30 6SL3202 0AE26 2SA0 37 6SL3202 0AE28 8SA0 45 FSE 55 6SL3202 0AE31 5SA0 FSF 75 90 6SL3202 0AE31 8SA0 110 6SL3000 2CE32 3AA0 132 FSG 1...

Page 37: ...rnet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109748645 Note dv dt filters plus VPL are available as optional components for converters of frame sizes FSH and FSJ Article number Converter variants dv dt filter plus VPL Frame size Rated power kW Article number FSH 315 6SL3000 2DE38 4AA0 355 400 FSJ 450 6SL3000 2DE41 4AA0 500 560 2 6 5 Operator panel An operator panel has been designed to en...

Page 38: ...ion kit comprises shield plates tooth ed tapes and fixing screws which can establish the shield and strain relief for the power connections The shield connection kit for the Power Module of converters in frame sizes FSB to FSG is provided as an optional component The shield connection kit for the Power Module of converters in frame size FSA is included in the scope of delivery of the converter and...

Page 39: ...o the motor winding may occur as a result Please observe the notes in the System Manual Requirements for third party motors Further information is provided on the Internet Requirements for third party motors https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 79690594 Multi motor operation Multi motor operation involves simultaneously operating several motors from one converter For standard induction...

Page 40: ...Description 2 7 Motors and multi motor drives that can be operated SINAMICS G120XA converter 38 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 41: ...HPSHUDWXUH LQH UHDFWRU RU OLQH ILOWHU QYHUWHU 2XWSXW UHDFWRU RQWURO FDELQHW LQH VXSSO ULYHQ PDFKLQH Figure 3 1 Example of the EMC zones of a plant or machine Inside the control cabinet Zone A Line supply connection Zone B Power electronics Devices in Zone B generate energy rich electromagnetic fields Zone C Control and sensors Devices in Zone C do not generate any energy rich electromagnetic field...

Page 42: ...ood electrical connection Mount the control cabinet components on a bare metal mounting plate Connect the mounting plate to the control cabinet frame and PE bar and shield support through a large surface area to establish a good electrical connection For screw connections onto painted or anodized surfaces establish a good conductive contact using one of the following methods Use special serrated c...

Page 43: ... EMC compliant installation is available in the Internet EMC installation guideline http support automation siemens com WW view en 60612658 3 1 2 Cables Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference are connected to the converter Cables with a high level of interference Cable between the line filter and converter Motor cable Cable at the converter DC link con...

Page 44: ...iated equipotential bonding cables parallel and close to one another Twist incoming and outgoing unshielded individual conductors Alternatively you can route incoming and outgoing conductors in parallel but close to one another Ground any unused conductors of signal and data cables at both ends Signal and data cables must only enter the cabinet from one side e g from below Using shielded cables fo...

Page 45: ...G 7RRWKHG WDSH RVH FODPS Figure 3 4 Examples for EMC compliant shield support Attach the shield to the shield support directly after the cable enters the cabinet Do not interrupt the shield Only use metallic or metallized plug connectors for shielded data cables 3 1 3 Electromechanical components Surge voltage protection circuit Connect surge voltage protection circuits to the following components...

Page 46: ...ower loss Total of the power losses of the individual components Δ T Permissible temperature rise in the control cabinet Ensure that the control cabinet is appropriately ventilated and equipped with suitable air filters Ensure that the components maintain the specified clearances with respect to one another Ensure that the components are provided with adequate cooling air through the cooling openi...

Page 47: ...le do not install it beneath pipes that are subject to condensation Avoid installing it where excessive humidity and condensation may occur Keep the device within the maximum and minimum operating temperatures At temperatures 40 C and installation altitudes 1000 m the devices must be derated Ensure that the correct level of ventilation and air flow is provided Fast temperature changes of the air d...

Page 48: ...tective devices are used The installation of the device in a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must prevent the spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination Protect the device e g by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NE...

Page 49: ...nces mm LGWK HLJKW HLJKW LQFOXGLQJ VKLHOG SODWH HSWK OHDUDQFH OHDUDQFH GGLWLRQDO GHSWK Frame size Height Height in cluding shield plate 1 Width Depth Additional depth Clearance 2 With oper ator panel With G120 Smart Ac cess A B lateral front FSA 232 330 73 209 9 7 80 100 0 3 FSB 275 383 100 209 9 7 80 100 0 3 FSC 295 423 140 209 9 7 80 100 0 3 FSD 472 625 200 239 9 7 300 350 0 3 FSE 551 729 275 23...

Page 50: ...l clearance for tolerance reasons we recommend a lateral clearance of approx 1 mm Max 60 C for mounting with 50 mm lateral clearance Drill patterns mm Table 3 1 FSA FSG Drill pattern Dimensions FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSG A 55 80 118 170 230 270 265 B 221 5 265 283 430 509 680 970 5 Ø 5 5 5 5 6 0 6 5 8 5 12 0 Fixings bolts washers nuts 4 M4 4 M4 4 M5 4 M5 4 M6 4 M8 4 M10 Tightening torque Nm 2 5 2...

Page 51: ...kit makes it simpler to install the converter in compliance with EMC regulations and to provide strength relief for the connected cables Mounting the shield connection kit for the Control Unit Note The shield connection kit for the Control Unit is available for converters FSD to FSG only Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the Control Unit and use a cross tip screwdriver to tighten the scr...

Page 52: ...eld plate in place using two screws 1P You have now mounted the shield connection kit Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module FSD FSG Note For converters FSD to FSG the shield connection kit for the Power Module is not included in the scope of delivery of the converter and only available optionally Mounting 3 3 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120XA converter 50 Operating Instructi...

Page 53: ...ut from the converter b Having ensured that it is positioned correctly fasten the EMC connecting bracket in place using three screws 1P 1P You have now mounted the shield connection kit Procedure FSF 1 Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the converter and fasten it in place using four screws 2 If the converter has an integrated line filter mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally by f...

Page 54: ...nnection kit 3 3 4 Additional mounting instructions for FSD FSJ 3 3 4 1 Additional mounting instructions FSD FSG When mounting the converters FSD to FSG the weight of the converter should be considered and appropriate hoisting gear for mounting should be applied Converter weight Technical data dependent on the power Page 866 Hoisting gear Use crane lifting lugs and the appropriate hoisting gear wh...

Page 55: ...th the lifting eyes Use a lifting harness where the ropes or chains are maintained in a vertical position The device must not be lifted at an angle because this can damage the housing Rope spreaders may have to be used PP Mounting 3 3 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 53 ...

Page 56: ... cabinet sizes for the installation of converters FSH and FSJ are provided as follows For FSH 800 mm width 2000 mm height 600 mm depth For FSJ 1000 mm width 2000 mm height 600 mm depth Before converter installation remove the side back and top plates from the cabinet frame and mount at least two support plates in the cabinet Mounting 3 3 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120XA converter 54 Operatin...

Page 57: ...ame 3 3 5 Mounting the optional components Depending on the particular application converters may require optional components For more information about optional components refer to Section Optional components Page 31 Mounting 3 3 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 55 ...

Page 58: ...Mounting 3 3 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120XA converter 56 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 59: ...ronics modules Note Fault protection for the motor circuit The electronic overcurrent trip complies with the requirements laid down in IEC 60364 3 2 2005 AMD1 Section 411 for protection against electric shock Observe the installation specifications provided in this manual Observe the applicable installation standards Ensure the continuity of the protective conductor 4 1 1 Permissible line supplies...

Page 60: ...ble 1 Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed If the grounding screw has been removed the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3 Operation not permissible Converter not available More information on removing the grounding connection in the converter Removing functional grounding of the converter Page 60 4 1 1 2 TT system Overview 7UDQVIRUPHU RU JHQHUDWRU 7R W...

Page 61: ...ormation on removing the grounding connection in the converter Removing functional grounding of the converter Page 60 4 1 1 3 IT system Overview 7UDQVIHU RI 1 LPSHGDQFH ZLWK UHVSHFW WR 3 SURWHFWLYH FRQGXFWRU 7UDQVIRUPHU RU JHQHUDWRU 7R WKH V VWHP DPSOH 1 3 Figure 4 3 IT system In an IT system all of the conductors are insulated with respect to the PE protective conductor or connected to the PE pro...

Page 62: ...h to use the converters with C3 line filter note the information in the following sections TN system Page 57 TT system Page 58 IT system Page 59 Precondition Switch off the converter power supply before removing the functional grounding WARNING Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components After the power supply has been switched off it takes up to 5 minutes until the capacit...

Page 63: ...on module of the Power Module must be opened Procedure 1 Remove the upper cover of the converter 2 Release the four screws and but do not remove the screws 3 Slide the connection clip towards the left until the clip is disconnected from the PE connections at screws and 4 Tighten all screws with 6 Nm 77 71 V VWHP 7 V VWHP Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instruct...

Page 64: ...ve conductor of the converter must not be interrupted for safe touch protection in converter operation This primarily results in requirements for the minimum conductor cross section of the protective conductor No restriction applies to the length of the protective conductor for touch protection However short protective conductors are advantageous for EMC compliant installation Description WARNING ...

Page 65: ...he protective conductor must fulfill at least one of the following conditions The protective conductor is routed so that it is protected against damage along its complete length Cables routed inside switch cabinets or enclosed machine housings are considered to be adequately protected against mechanical damage As a conductor of a multi conductor cable the protective conductor has a cross section 2...

Page 66: ... the first environment Electromagnetic compatibility of the converter Page 873 Overview The longer the motor cable of the converter the higher the line capacitances of the motor cable Line capacitances cause an additive current in converter operation and present an additional load to the converter Therefore a maximum permissible motor cable length is specified for each converter Options between co...

Page 67: ...rmissible motor cable length 1 Converter frame size 400 V Maximum motor cable length With shiel ded motor cable Without output reactor or dv dt filter FSA FSC 150 m FSD FSE 200 m FSF FSG 300 m FSH FSJ 150 m 2 With 2 output reactors in ser ies FSD FSE 350 m FSF FSG 525 m With 1 output reactor FSH FSJ 300 m 2 With un shielded motor cable Without output reactor or dv dt filter FSA FSC 300 m FSD FSE 3...

Page 68: ...upply the motor connections of the converter may carry dangerous voltages When the motor is connected to the converter there is danger to life through contact with the motor terminals if the motor terminal box is open Close the motor terminal box before connecting the converter to the line supply 4 1 4 1 Connection overview Note Line filter The converters are available with or without integrated l...

Page 69: ...onents 2XWSXW UHDFWRU RU GY GW ILOWHU RQYHUWHU 9ROWDJH 3HDN LPLWHU LQH ILOWHU LQH UHDFWRU 8 9 3 3 9 8 8 9 3 3 3 9 8 8 9 9 8 16 36 3 9 8 1 3 3 Figure 4 6 Connecting converters FSH FSJ and their optional components Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 67 ...

Page 70: ...4 1 4 2 Connecting inverters Connecting converters FSA FSC LQH VXSSO 0RWRU 9 8 Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter 68 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 71: ...crews from the cover and then remove it In addition you must make openings on the connection cover for the line supply and power cables Use side cutters or a fine saw blade 1 2 3 Figure 4 8 Removing the connection cover and making openings FSF FSG After the cables are connected you must re attach the cover in order to re establish the touch protection of the converter Wiring 4 1 Line supply and mo...

Page 72: ...shown below to gain better access to the terminals for the power connections WARNING Damage to converter as a result of operation without insulating plates Without the insulating plates voltage flashovers may occur between the phases Replace the insulating plates after connecting the cables Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter 70 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E4475...

Page 73: ...H 1P 1P The diagram shows the layout of line and motor terminals DC link terminals and terminal strip X9 LQH VXSSO 0RWRU LQH VXSSO 0RWRU 3 3 1 8 9 8 3 9 3 9 8 3 1 6 6 9 8 3 Figure 4 10 Connections for the line supply and motor For more information about the connection of terminal strip X9 see Chapter Terminal strip X9 FSH FSJ only Page 97 Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter ...

Page 74: ...age The converter must be built in an enclosure of degree of protection IP20 at least and prevention measures against electric shock must be adopted 4 1 4 3 Cable cross sections and screw tightening torques Converter frame size Terminal connector type Cable cross section Screw tightening torque Nm lbf in Stripped in sulation length mm FSA Line motor and PE Screw type termi nal 1 5 2 5 mm2 16 14 AW...

Page 75: ...80 mm 8 mm 4 1 4 4 Cable lugs For cable connections using cable lugs the maximum dimensions of the cable lugs are listed in the table below These cable lugs are not to exceed these dimensions as mechanical fastening and adherence to the voltage distances is not guaranteed otherwise D G O F G Converter frame size Screw bolt Cable cross sec tion mm2 a mm c mm d1 mm d mm l mm FSF M10 120 26 22 10 5 3...

Page 76: ...e cable shields FSA FSC The shield support for converter FSB is displayed as an example Unshielded line cable Cable tie Shielded communication cable Unlacquered good electrically conducting mounting plate Shielded control cable Toothed tape Shielded motor cable Note For FSA FSC connect the cable shields of the communication cable and the control cable to the same point of the shield plate using on...

Page 77: ...er FSD is displayed as an example Unshielded line cable Toothed tape Shielded motor cable Shielded control cable Hose clamp Shielded communication cable Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 75 ...

Page 78: ...h 87 Hz characteristic I I1 ෭ ෪ I1 8 81 ෭ ෪ 81 ෭ ෪ 31 9 9 I 0 01 I 3 31 9 8 8 8 8 9 9 In a delta connection the motor is oper ated with a voltage and frequency above its rated values As a consequence the motor power is increased by a factor 3 1 73 In the range f 0 87 Hz the motor can output its rated torque MN The maximum voltage U 400 V is avail able at a frequency of f 3 50 Hz 87 Hz The motor on...

Page 79: ...he Control Unit you must open the front door Bus terminating resistor Terminal strip Status LED Connection to the operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Memory card slot Terminal strips Fieldbus interfaces at the lower side Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 77 ...

Page 80: ...rature sen sor 6 4 2 2 1 4 2 2 Fieldbus interface allocation Interfaces at the lower side of the Control Unit 6 1 FDEOH VKLHOG 3 56 3 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 1 56 1 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 9 UHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLDO 0RGEXV 578 866 Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter 78 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 81: ...ation is required between the supply network and the digital output Figure 4 11 Wiring the digital inputs with p switching contacts and an internal 24 V power supply terminal 9 All terminals with the GND reference potential are internally connected with one another The reference potential DI COM is not internally connected with GND If as shown above you wish to use the 24 V supply from terminal 9 ...

Page 82: ... switching to p potential with an external power supply The following diagram shows how you use the digital inputs for the contacts that switch to m potential 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 9H W 1 H W Figure 4 13 Connecting contacts switching to m potential with an external power supply Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter 80 Operating Instructions 03 201...

Page 83: ...GJH IDXOW 21 2 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH P P 1R IXQFWLRQ DXOW 2SHUDWLRQ 5HDG ODUP 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 7 02725 7 02725 Figure 4 14 Factory interface settings Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 81 ...

Page 84: ...vice pump 2 Service pump 2 Fixed setpoint 2 DI 3 Service pump 3 Fixed setpoint 3 DI 4 manual auto manual auto manual auto local remote DI 5 Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault DO 0 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault DO 1 Operation Operation Operation Pump 1 Operation Operation DO 2 Ready for opera tion Ready for opera tion Pu...

Page 85: ...Operation Operation Pump 1 Operation Operation Operation Operation DO 2 Ready Pump 1 Pump 2 Ready Ready for op eration Ready for op eration Ready for op eration DO 3 Alarm Pump 2 Pump 3 Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Function description Default setting 41 Analog control Analog control is the default factory setting FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU...

Page 86: ...p0771 1 27 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI FINISH Default setting 42 PID controller with analog control 6ZLWFKRYHU PDQXDO ർ DXWR FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ QDEOH FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 9 RXW ...

Page 87: ...0 29659 0 p0844 0 29659 1 p2200 722 4 p2104 0 722 5 AI 0 p2253 0 755 0 p1070 0 755 0 AI 1 p2264 0 755 1 AO 0 p0771 0 21 AO 1 p0771 1 27 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI PID FINISH Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 85 ...

Page 88: ...0015 43 Q PLQ PLQ 9 9 9 Q 9 9 9 Q 2 P P PLQ PLQ 2 P P DI 0 ON OFF1 OFF2 DI 1 DI 2 DI 4 DI 5 p29652 0 722 0 p29650 0 0 p0840 0 29659 0 p0844 0 29659 1 p29543 0 722 1 p29543 1 722 2 p2200 722 4 p2104 0 722 5 AI 0 p2253 0 755 0 p1070 0 755 0 AI 1 p2264 0 755 1 AO 0 p0771 0 21 AO 1 p0771 1 27 Multi pump con trol p29520 1 p29521 2 p29539 1 p29540 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 29529 ...

Page 89: ...R FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH DXOW QDEOH FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 2 12 9 RXW 1 1 1 Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 87 ...

Page 90: ...771 1 27 Multi pump control p29520 1 p29521 3 p29539 1 p29540 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 29529 0 p0732 29529 1 p0733 29529 2 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI 3XP FINISH Default setting 45 Fixed setpoint control L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 2 2 1...

Page 91: ...p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X FIX FINISH Default setting 46 AI control local remote 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW UHPRWH 6HWSRLQW 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 2...

Page 92: ... 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI I r FINISH Default setting 47 PID controller with internal fixed setpoint FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 6HWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 ...

Page 93: ... 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X FIXPId FINISH Default setting 48 2 pumps and internal fixed setpoint 3XPS 3XPS 2SHUDWLRQ FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH DXOW FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU QDEOH L HG VHWSRLQW 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6ZLWFKRYHU PDQXDO ർ DXWR 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20...

Page 94: ...9 0 p0733 29529 1 Multi pump control p29520 1 p29521 2 p29539 1 p29540 1 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X In 2XP FINISH Default setting 49 3 pumps and internal fixed setpoint 3XPS FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 3XPS DXOW 3XPS FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU QDEOH L HG VHWSRLQW 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6ZLWFKRYHU PDQXDO ർ...

Page 95: ...p0731 29529 0 p0732 29529 1 p0733 29529 2 Setpoint p1070 0 1024 p2253 0 1024 p1020 0 65536 Multi pump control p29520 1 p29521 3 p29539 1 p29540 1 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X In 3XP FINISH Default setting 51 Modbus RTU control RQWURO YLD 0RGEXV 578 bEDXG FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 ...

Page 96: ...33 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X Fb mod FINISH Default setting 52 Modbus RTU control local remote RQWURO YLD 0RGEXV 578 bEDXG 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO ർ UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 2...

Page 97: ...p2020 8 p2030 2 p2040 65000 p0854 0 2090 10 p1070 0 2050 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X modl r FINISH Default setting 54 USS control RQWURO YLD 866 DXG 3 3 FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 ...

Page 98: ...733 52 7 Procedure with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X fb USS FINISH Default setting 55 USS control local remote RQWURO YLD 866 bEDXG 3 3 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO ർ UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW 2 2 1 2 2 1 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 ...

Page 99: ... the terminal strips Page 129 4 2 6 Terminal strip X9 FSH FSJ only Terminal strip X9 is used to connect an external 24 V DC power supply and to connect a main or bypass contactor To access terminal strip X9 you must first remove the front cover from the converter Connecting inverters Page 68 Fault and alarm signals can be connected to the digital inputs The external 24 V DC power supply must be co...

Page 100: ... If the cables are introduced at the side at the height of terminal X9 the strain relief must be provided outside the Power Module Terminal Name Meaning Input output Technical data 1 P24 External power sup ply Input Voltage 24 V DC 20 1 V 28 8 V Current consumption max 2 A 2 M Electronics ground Reference 3 External alert External alarm Input Voltage 3 V 30 V Current consumption 6 4 mA at 24 V DC ...

Page 101: ...on line contactor Line contactor control Output Maximum connection cross section 2 5 mm 14 AWG Minimum connection cross section 0 2 mm 25 AWG Maximum tightening torque 0 5 Nm 4 4 lbf in 4 2 7 Wiring the terminal strips WARNING Electric shock due to unsuitable motor temperature evaluation system Voltage flashovers to the electronics of the converter can occur in motors without safe electrical separ...

Page 102: ...nductive circuits at the digital inputs can lead to overvoltage Overvoltages can damage the converter Connect an overvoltage protection device between the terminal and the associated reference potential We recommend using the Weidmüller overvoltage protection terminal with designation MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC WARNING Electric shock due to damaged insulation Damaged insulation of cables carrying haz...

Page 103: ...XV WHUPLQDWLQJ UHVLVWRU 21 21 2 2 Figure 4 15 Connection with the fieldbus via RS485 The RS485 ports of the converter are short circuit proof and isolated You must switch in the bus terminating resistor for the first and last nodes Overview of the interfaces Page 77 Table 4 10 Maximum cable length Modbus RTU USS BACnet MS TP 1200 m 1200 m for a baud rate up to 38400 bit s and maximum of 32 nodes 1...

Page 104: ...Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120XA converter 102 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 105: ...irements to be met by the drive for your application Page 105 2 Restore the factory settings of the converter if necessary Page 124 3 Check if the factory setting of the converter is sufficient for your application Page 108 4 Set the following for quick commissioning of the drive The closed loop motor control The inputs and outputs The fieldbus interface Page 110 5 Check if additional converter fu...

Page 106: ...server module and an engineering tool that provides wireless connection to a PC a tablet or a smartphone It is designed for quick commissioning parameterization and maintenance of the converters SINAMICS G120 Smart Access is only for commissioning and thus cannot be used with the converter permanently Operating instructions of the SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Manuals and technical support Page 884 C...

Page 107: ...a If available note down the motor code on the motor s nameplate 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 3RZHU 6SHHG UWLFOH 1R 1 0 1 0 Figure 5 1 Example of the rating plate for a standard induction motor How is the motor connected Pay attention to the connection of the motor star connection Y or delta connection Δ Note the appropriate motor data for connecting Commissioning 5 3 Preparing for commissioning SINAMICS G120XA...

Page 108: ...the type plate of the motor Figure 5 2 Example of a type plate for a reluctance motor How is the motor connected Pay attention to the connection of the motor star connection Y or delta connection Δ Note the appropriate motor data for connecting Commissioning 5 3 Preparing for commissioning SINAMICS G120XA converter 106 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 109: ...erial number S ZVK5375000118 Production date May 2018 Table 5 1 Production year and month Digit Production year Digit Month of manufacture K 2018 1 9 January September L 2019 0 October M 2020 N November D December Function description You form the DC link capacitors by supplying the converter with a line voltage of 100 of the rated voltage for a defined time RUPLQJ IRU VWRUDJH WLPHV RI HDUV RUPLQJ...

Page 110: ...p time defines the maximum motor acceleration when the speed setpoint changes The ramp up time refers to the time from standstill up to the set maximum motor speed The converter only permits speed setpoints in one direction of rotation The converter switches off the motor after the OFF2 command The motor coasts down to a standstill Minimum and maximum speed Minimum speed factory setting 0 rpm Afte...

Page 111: ...ta in the converter For basic applications you can try to operate the drive with a rated power 18 5 kW without any other commissioning steps Check whether the control quality of the drive without commissioning is adequate for the requirements of the application Commissioning 5 3 Preparing for commissioning SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 109 ...

Page 112: ...e Operator Panel into the matching recess of the Control Unit 3 Plug the operator panel BOP 2 onto the converter until the latch audibly engages You have plugged the BOP 2 onto the converter The operator panel BOP 2 is ready for operation when you connect the converter to the power supply Commissioning 5 4 Quick commissioning using the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120XA converter 110 Operating I...

Page 113: ...KH PRWRU GDWD LGHQWLILFDWLRQ PHWKRG 6HOHFW WKH DSSOLFDWLRQ QWHU WKH GULYH GDWD 6HOHFW WKH PRWRU FRQWURO PRGH 6HW PLQLPXP DQG PD LPXP VSHHGV UDPS XS DQG UDPS GRZQ WLPHV 3DUDPHWHUV WR EH VHW SHUW S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S 6WDQGDUG GULYH FRQWURO QDPLF GULYH FRQWURO S SHUW S S S S S S 9 N PLQ 6WDQGDUG ULYH RQWURO QDPLF ULYH RQWURO SHUW 6WDQGDUG ULYH RQWURO QDPLF ULYH RQWURO Figure 5 5 Quick co...

Page 114: ...d as follows 1 Press the OK key 2 Switchover the display using an arrow key nO YES 3 Press the OK key When selecting an application class the converter assigns the motor control with the appropriate default settings Standard Drive Control Page 114 Dynamic Drive Control Page 116 Expert Page 118 Depending on the particular Power Module the converter skips selecting the application class If the BOP 2...

Page 115: ...lications Motor power ratings 11 kW For load surges of 10 100 of the rated motor torque Dynamic Drive Control is necessary for a ramp up time 0 rated speed dependent on the rated motor power 1 s 0 1 kW 10 s 132 kW Application ex amples Pumps fans and compressors with flow characteristic Pumps and compressors with displacement machines Motors that can be operated Induction motors Induction and sync...

Page 116: ...d a motor type with motor code you must now enter the motor code The converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code If you do not know the motor code then you must set the motor code 0 and enter motor data from p0304 and higher from the rating plate 87 Hz motor operation The BOP 2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor standard EUR USA P100 kW 50 Hz R...

Page 117: ...tion has been completed STILL Recommended setting Measure the motor data at standstill The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely ROT Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed ST RT OP setting sam...

Page 118: ... deviate from the list shown above If you have selected a motor type with motor code you must now enter the motor code The converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code If you do not know the motor code then you must set the motor code 0 and enter motor data from p0304 and higher from the rating plate 87 Hz motor operation The BOP 2 only indicates this step if you sele...

Page 119: ...ification Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of the connected motor OFF Motor data is not measured STIL ROT Recommended setting Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed STILL Default setting Measure the motor data at standstill The converter switches off t...

Page 120: ...esponding motor type with motor code Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate INDUCT Third party induction motor 1L IND 1LE1 1LG6 1LA7 1LA9 induction motors Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate 1LE1 IND 100 1LE1 9 1PC1 IND 1PC1 Depending on the converter the motor list in BOP 2 can deviate from the list shown above If you have selected a motor type with motor code you mu...

Page 121: ...nd fans with optimized efficiency The setting only makes sense for steady state operation with slow speed changes We recommend setting VEC STD if load surges in operation cannot be ruled out V LOAD Applications with high breakaway torque Select the control mode VF LIN U f control with linear characteristic VF LIN F Flux current control FCC VF QUAD U f control with square law characteristic SPD N E...

Page 122: ...ollowing applications Motor power ratings 11 kW For load surges of 10 100 of the rated motor torque The control mode is necessary for a ramp up time 0 Rated speed dependent on the rated motor power 1 s 0 1 kW 10 s 250 kW Application ex amples Pumps fans and compressors with flow characteristic Pumps and compressors with displacement machines Motors that can be operated Induction motors Induction a...

Page 123: ...ou have selected control mode SPD N EN but the motor cannot rotate freely You have selected U f control as control mode e g VF LIN or VF QUAD ROT Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed ST RT OP setting same as STIL ROT After the motor data identification the motor accelerates to the current setp...

Page 124: ...motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results WARNING Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress For the stationary measurement the motor can make several rotations The rotating measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed Secure dangerous machine parts before starting motor data identification Before switching on ensure that nobody ...

Page 125: ...er Depending on the setting after motor data identification has been completed the converter switches off the motor or it accelerates it to the setpoint If required switch off the motor Switch the converter control from HAND to AUTO You have completed the motor data identification Quick commissioning has been completed once the motor data identification has been successfully completed 027 Commissi...

Page 126: ... not able to complete commissioning Resetting to factory setting with the BOP 2 operator panel Procedure 1 In the Options menu select the DRVRESET entry 2 Confirm the reset using the OK key 3 Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory setting You have reset the converter to the factory settings Commissioning 5 5 Restoring the factory settings SINAMICS G120XA converter 124 Operating Ins...

Page 127: ... the drive control Changeover drive control Page 196 Setpoints and setpoint conditioning The setpoint generally determines the motor speed Pump control Page 200 The setpoint processing uses a ramp function generator to prevent speed steps occurring and to limit the speed to a permissible maximum value Setpoints and setpoint processing Page 224 Technology controller The technology controller contro...

Page 128: ... Increasing the drive availability The drive can bridge temporary power failures or be switched on while the motor is rotating Drive availability Page 318 Energy saving The converter optimizes the efficiency optimization of the standard induction motor or disconnects the power module from the system if necessary Energy saving Page 329 Advanced commissioning 6 1 Overview of the converter functions ...

Page 129: ...itch on the motor The converter switches on the motor with the ON command The converter changes to the Operation state After the OFF2 command the converter switches off the motor immediately without first braking it The converter is again ready to start Precondition Functions In order to be able to respond to external commands you must set the command interface so that it fits your specific applic...

Page 130: ...flow in the motor and the motor does not generate any torque Current flows in the motor and the motor generates a torque S1 The OFF3 command is active You must deactivate the OFF3 command and activate the ON command again in order to make the converter exit the state S4 The motor is switched on S2 The converter waits for a new command to switch on the motor S5b The motor is still switched on The c...

Page 131: ...ly close holding brake 0 p0860 BI Line contactor feedback signal 863 1 p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms p1226 D Speed threshold for standstill detection 20 rpm p1227 Standstill detection monitoring time 300 s p1228 Pulse suppression delay time 0 01 s For additional information on parameters please refer to the parameter list Parameters Page 349 6 2 2 Adapt the default setting of the ter...

Page 132: ... 1 U 2 U Q 2 U Q 2 U Q U U U U U 2 U 2 U S 2 S S S 2 12 2 20 S 2 U Q 2 12 2 20 S S S S S S S U S S U 8 8 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 130 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 133: ...e 4 ms p0810 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 0 0 p0840 C BI ON OFF OFF1 Dependent on the converter p0844 C BI No coast down coast down OFF2 signal source 1 Dependent on the converter p0848 C BI No quick stop quick stop OFF3 signal source 1 1 p0852 C BI Enable operation inhibit operation Dependent on the converter p1020 C BI Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 0 p1021 C BI Fixed speed setpoi...

Page 134: ... 1 Acknowledge faults Dependent on the converter p2106 C BI External fault 1 1 p2112 C BI External alarm 1 1 For further binector inputs and additional information on parameters please refer to the parameter list Parameters Page 352 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 132 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 135: ...QSXW 2XWSXW 7HUPLQDOV U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 9 9 S S S S S 7 7 7 7 S 7 7 S S S S S S S U S U S S S S U U U U Figure 6 3 FP 2221 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 133 ...

Page 136: ...ital input with 10 V or with 24 V NOTICE Defective analog input due to overcurrent If the analog input switch is set to Current input I a 10 V or 24 V voltage source results in an overcurrent at the analog input An overcurrent condition destroys the analog input If you use an analog input as a digital input then you must set the analog input switch to Voltage U Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive con...

Page 137: ...QDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 7HUPLQDO HERXQFH HERXQFH 6LPXODWLRQ RQ S 9 9 9 9 S 7 U U U U S U S 7 S U U U U S U 8 ದ 8 8 ದ 8 Figure 6 4 FP 2256 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 135 ...

Page 138: ... To change the function of a digital output you must interconnect the digital output with a binector output of your choice Binector outputs are designated in the parameter list with a BO as prefix Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 136 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 139: ... 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO LJLWDO RXWSXWV 2 ಹ 2 QSXW 2XWSXW 7HUPLQDOV 1 20 12 2 20 12 2 U U U S S S S S 20 12 2 20 12 2 U S S S Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 137 ...

Page 140: ...ive 06 1 signal Switching on inhibited active 07 1 signal Alarm active 08 0 signal Deviation setpoint actual speed 09 1 signal Control request 10 1 signal Maximum speed p1082 reached 11 0 signal I M P limit reached 13 0 signal Alarm motor overtemperature 14 1 signal Motor clockwise rotation 15 0 signal Alarm converter overload r0053 0 11 CO BO Status word 2 00 1 signal DC braking active 02 1 signa...

Page 141: ...nipolar current input 0 mA 20 mA 2 Unipolar current input monitored 4 mA 20 mA 3 Bipolar voltage input factory setting 10 V 10 V 4 Defining the function of an analog input You define the analog input function by interconnecting a connector input of your choice with parameter p0755 Parameter p0755 is assigned to the particular analog input via its index e g parameter p0755 0 is assigned to analog i...

Page 142: ...the converter p1075 C CI Supplementary setpoint 0 p2253 C CI Technology controller setpoint 1 0 p2264 C CI Technology controller actual value 0 You can find additional connector inputs in the parameter list Parameters Page 352 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 140 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 143: ... LQSXW VLJQDO UHIHUUHG WR JURXQG O O PXVW EH FRQQHFWHG WR UHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLDO 0 7KH YROWDJH EHWZHHQ LQSXWV DQG EHWZHHQ LQSXW DQG WKH JURXQG SRLQW PXVW QRW H FHHG 9 KHQ WKH 3 VZLWFK LV LQ SRVLWLRQ WKH LQSXW YROWDJH PXVW QRW H FHHG 9 RU WKH LPSUHVVHG FXUUHQW P I WKLV LV QRW REVHUYHG WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH GDPDJHG 6FDOLQJ DUGZDUH VPRRWKLQJ XUUHQW 9ROWDJH QDORJ LQSXWV QSXW 2XWSXW 7HUPLQDOV 8 P P 9 9 S S S ...

Page 144: ...Parameters p0757 p0760 are assigned to an analog input via their index e g parameters p0757 0 p0760 0 belong to analog input 0 9ROWDJH LQSXW 9 9 XUUHQW LQSXW P P S S S S S S P S S S S 9 You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular application Example The converter should convert a 6 mA 12 mA signal into the value range 100 100 via analog input 0 The wi...

Page 145: ...ic value x2 10 p0760 0 1 CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 100 p0761 0 1 CU analog inputs wire break monitoring response threshold 2 6 2 2 6 Setting the deadband Function description HDG EDQG HDG EDQG 9 P 9 P With the control enabled electromagnetic interference on the signal cable can cause the motor to slowly rotate in one direction in spite of a speed setpoint 0 The deadband acts on the ...

Page 146: ...cription Factory setting p0764 0 Analog inputs deadband AI 0 0 p0764 1 Analog inputs deadband AI 1 0 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 144 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 147: ...n by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector output of your choice Parameter p0771 is assigned to the specific analog output via its index e g parameter p0771 0 is assigned to analog output 0 Example 2 U S To output the converter output current via analog output 0 you must interconnect AO 0 with the signal for the output current Set p0771 27 Parameters Table 6 6 Frequently used connector ...

Page 148: ... current smoothed Arms r0063 CO Speed actual value rpm You can find additional connector outputs in the parameter list Parameters Page 349 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 146 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 149: ...HUUHG WR WKH UHIHUHQFH TXDQWLWLHV S U S RU S WKH XQLWV DUH 9 RU S WKH XQLWV DUH P QDORJ RXWSXWV ಹ 2 ಹ 2 QSXW 2XWSXW 7HUPLQDOV 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO y S S 2 1 S 9 S 9 U U S S S S PV S S P 2 1 S 9 S 9 U U S S S S PV S S P P P 9 9 P P Figure 6 6 FP 2261 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 147 ...

Page 150: ...0777 0 p0770 0 belong to analog output 0 You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular application Example Via analog output 0 the converter should convert a signal in the value range 0 100 into an output signal 6 mA 12 mA XUUHQW RXWSXW P P P S S S S Procedure 1 Set p0776 0 2 This defines analog output 0 as a current output 2 Set p0777 0 0 0 x1 3 Set p0...

Page 151: ...oceed as follows to activate communication via Modbus RTU 1 Start quick commissioning 2 In the first steps of the quick commissioning confirm all of the values that have already been set 3 Select one of the following default settings 51 Modbus RTU control 52 Modbus RTU control local remote Default setting of the interfaces Page 82 4 In the next steps of the quick commissioning confirm all addition...

Page 152: ...dbus interface address 0 6 2 3 3 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU General settings Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 2 Modbus RTU Baud rate p2020 7 19200 bit s Setting range 4800 bit s 187500 bit s Parity In the factory the Control Unit is set for controllers with even parity You can adapt the parity at your controller using p2031 p2031 0 No parity p2031 1 Odd parity p2031 2 Par...

Page 153: ...ics r2029 Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface Interconnecting analog outputs If you set communication via Modbus p2030 2 then the analog outputs of the converter are internally interconnected with the fieldbus analog outputs p0771 0 791 0 p0771 1 791 1 The values for p0791 0 and p0791 1 are written via registers 40523 and 40524 Interconnections between parameter p0791 and other sou...

Page 154: ...ication via Modbus p2030 2 when restoring the factory settings the analog outputs are again interconnected with p0771 0 791 0 and p0771 1 791 1 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 152 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 155: ... telegram W W W W W W W FKDUDFWHU GHOD WLPH ุ E WH ุ E WH DWD 0RGEXV 578 WHOHJUDP E WHV E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH SSOLNDWLRQ DWD 8QLW 0RGEXV IUDPH SSOLNDWLRQ DWD 8QLW 0RGEXV IUDPH QGH GHOD 6WDUW GHOD XQFWLRQ RGH QWHU IUDPH GHOD QWHU IUDPH GHOD 6ODYH 5 ORZ 5 KLJK 5 3URWRFRO DWD 8QLW 3 8 Figure 6 7 Modbus with delay times The data area of the telegram is structured according to th...

Page 156: ...ms 8 021 ms 3 438 ms 9600 1 146 ms 4 010 ms 1 719 ms 19200 factory setting 0 573 ms 1 75 ms 0 859 ms 38400 0 286 ms 1 75 ms 0 75 ms 57600 0 191 ms 1 75 ms 0 556 ms 76800 0 143 ms 1 75 ms 0 417 ms 93750 0 117 ms 1 75 ms 0 341 ms 115200 0 095 ms 1 75 ms 0 278 ms 187500 0 059 ms 1 75 ms 0 171 ms Note The factory setting for p2024 1 and p2024 2 is 0 The converter defines the particular values dependin...

Page 157: ...ing Data parameter 40100 Control word R W 1 Process data 1 40101 Main setpoint R W 1 Process data 2 40110 Status word R 1 Process data 1 40111 Main actual value R 1 Process data 2 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 155 ...

Page 158: ...HIGH LOW r0722 5 Analog inputs 40260 AI 0 R 100 300 0 300 0 r0755 0 40261 AI 1 R 100 300 0 300 0 r0755 1 Table 6 11 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters converter data Regis ter Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40300 Powerstack number R 1 0 32767 r0200 40301 Converter firmware R 1 e g 470 r0018 10000 40320 Rated power R kW 100 0 327 67 r0206 40321...

Page 159: ... 1 0 32767 r2110 0 40409 Actual alarm code R 1 0 32767 r2132 40499 PRM ERROR code R 1 0 255 Table 6 13 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters technology controller Regis ter Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40500 Technology controller enable R W 1 0 1 p2200 r2349 0 40501 Technology controller MOP R W 100 200 0 200 0 p2240 Technology controller adjus...

Page 160: ...ol R W 40602 DS47 header R W 40603 DS47 data 1 R W 40722 DS47 data 120 R W Table 6 16 Modbus registers for multi pump control Register Last reg ister Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40800 Status word R 1 0 65535 p29529 40801 Motor index speed control R 1 0 3 p29538 40802 Status word service mode R 1 0 65535 p29544 40804 40805 Motor 1 operating hours R W h 10...

Page 161: ...equest length bytes Request data Activate acyclic access 2 47 Response length bytes Response data Response for a successful request 2 47 0 Error code Response for an erronous request Error codes 1 hex Invalid Length invalid length 2 hex Invalid State in the actual inverter state this action is not permitted 3 hex Invalid function code FC 2F hex 4 hex Response not ready the response has still not b...

Page 162: ...tructure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 FC 03 Any valid register address is permitted as the start address Via FC 03 the control can address more than one register with one request The number of addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request Table 6 17 Structure of a read request via slave number 17 example Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 00 h...

Page 163: ... value The start address and the number of registers of an address are located outside of a defined register block Exception code 02 invalid data address Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 FC 06 Start address is the holding register address Via FC 06 with one request only precisely one register can be addressed The value which is written to the addressed register is contained...

Page 164: ...eters acyclically via FC 16 Via FC 16 with one request up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other while for Write Single Register FC 06 you must individually write the header data for each register Header In addition to the slave address enter the transfer type the start address and the number of the following registers in the header User data You control the access in the ...

Page 165: ...Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17 Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 0258 h 0007 h 0010 h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Function code read Register start address Number of registers to be read 40601 40607 Number of registers xx h xx h 8 9 CRC Low CRC High Table 6 25 Response for successful read operation Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 20 h 0002 h 2F08 h 8001...

Page 166: ...6 Function code write multiple Register start address Number of registers to be written to 40601 40610 Number of data bytes 10 registers each 2 bytes 20 bytes 40601 C1 activate request 40602 Function 2F h 47 request length 16 bytes 10 h 40603 Request reference 80 h request identifier 2 h write 40604 DO Id 1 number of parameters 1 40605 Attribute number of elements 1 40606 Parameter number 1121 406...

Page 167: ... registers 40601 DS47 Control 1 request is processed 40602 Function 2F h 47 response length 0 fault 40603 Error code 0004 Response Not Ready response has still not been issued xx h xx h 9 10 CRC Low CRC High 6 2 3 10 Communication procedure Procedure for communication in a normal case Normally the master sends a telegram to a slave address range 1 247 The slave sends a response telegram to the mas...

Page 168: ...se time is the time in which the Modbus master expects a response to a request Set the same slave response time p2024 0 in the converter in the master and slave Process data monitoring time setpoint timeout p2040 Setpoint timeout F1910 is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value 0 ms and no process data is requested within this time period The Setpoint timeout only applies for access to pro...

Page 169: ...es that have already been set 3 Select one of the following default settings 54 USS control 55 USS control local remote Default setting of the interfaces Page 82 4 In the next steps of the quick commissioning confirm all additional values that have already been set 5 Exit quick commissioning You have activated communication via USS Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter...

Page 170: ... Overview A USS telegram comprises a series of elements with a defined sequence Each element contains 11 bits 6WDUW GHOD 866 IUDPH Q QHW GDWD LQDO LQIRUPDWLRQ HDGHU LQIRUPDWLRQ ELW GDWD LW 6WRS LW 3 HYHQ LW 6WDUW 67 5 Q Figure 6 8 Structure of a USS telegram Telegram part Description Start delay re sponse delay There is always a start and or response delay between two telegrams Telegram monitoring...

Page 171: ...legram Overview The user data of the telegram consist of the following elements Parameter channel PIV for writing and reading parameter values Process data PZD for controlling the drive 3 9 3 VWUXFWXUH DWD E WH RJ GDWD 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQHO 3 9 RJ ZRUGV YDULDEOH OHQJWK 3URFHVV GDWD 3 3 1 3 3 3 P 3 3 3 3 3 P 3 3 3 6 3 3 S S S S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 67 6 67 6 Figure 6 9 USS telegram user data structu...

Page 172: ...Parameter Description Factory setting p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number 2 p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number 127 6 2 4 5 USS process data channel PZD Function description The process data channel PZD contains the following data depending on the transmission direction Control words and setpoints for the slave Status words and actual values for the master QVZHU WR 866 PDVWHU 5HTXLUHPHQW W...

Page 173: ...on generator can be enabled 5 0 Stop RFG The output of the ramp function generator stops at the actual value p1141 0 r2090 5 1 Enable RFG The output of the ramp function generator follows the setpoint 6 0 Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp down time p1121 of the ramp function generator p1142 0 r2090 6 1 Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with the ramp up t...

Page 174: ... 6 7 1 Alarm active Motor remains switched on no acknowledgement is necessary p2080 7 r2139 7 8 1 Speed deviation within the tolerance range Setpoint actual value deviation within the tolerance range p2080 8 r2197 7 9 1 Master control re quested The automation system is requested to accept the converter control p2080 9 r0899 9 10 1 Comparison speed reached or exceeded Speed is greater than or equa...

Page 175: ...WHOHJUDP UXQWLPH 5HVLGXDO UXQWLPH FRPSUHVVHG WHOHJUDP RI FRPSUHVVHG WHOHJUDP UHVLGXDO UXQWLPH Q 5 67 Q 5 67 Figure 6 11 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times The total telegram runtime is always less than 150 of the pure residual runtime Before each request telegram the master must maintain the start delay The start delay must be 2 character runtime The slav...

Page 176: ...unication via USS the converter checks bit 10 of the received control word 1 If the bit is not set when the motor is switched on Operation the converter responds with fault F07220 Parameters Parameter Description Factory setting p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 100 ms 6 2 4 7 USS parameter channel Structure of the parameter channel Depending on the setting in p2023 the parameter channel ha...

Page 177: ...ge parameter value field word 1 4 7 8 8 2 Change parameter value field double word 1 5 7 8 9 Request number of field elements 6 7 8 1 The required element of the parameter is specified in IND 2nd word 2 The following request IDs are identical 1 6 2 7 and 3 8 We recommend that you use identifiers 6 7 and 8 Table 6 35 Response identifiers converter control AK Description 0 No response 1 Transfer par...

Page 178: ...927 0C hex Keyword missing 11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state access is not possible for temporary reasons that are not specified 14 hex Inadmissible value change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other permanent reasons i e a parameter with defined individual values 65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated depending on the mo...

Page 179: ...2 Parameter value Bit 15 0 Bit 15 8 Bit 7 0 0 0 8 bit value 0 16 bit value 32 bit value Connector Bit 15 0 Bit 15 10 Bit 9 0 Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field number of the connec tor Examples Read request Read out serial number of the Power Module p7841 2 To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841 you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the following d...

Page 180: ...he parameter number minus the offset into the PNU PKE bit 10 0 Write the offset in the page index IND bit 15 8 Table 6 38 Offset and page index of the parameter numbers Parameter number Offset Page index Hex Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 0000 1999 0 0 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2000 3999 2000 80 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6000 7999 6000 90 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 8000 9999 8000 20 hex 0 0 1 ...

Page 181: ...am of the parameter channel with the following data PKE bit 12 15 AK 6 request parameter value field PKE bit 0 10 PNU 1841 Parameter number without offset Parameter number PNU offset page index 7841 1841 6000 IND bit 8 15 page index 90 hex offset 6000 90 hex IND bit 0 7 subindex 2 Index of the parameter Because you want to read the parameter value words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for request...

Page 182: ...120 always 63 3f hex PWE2 bit 0 9 2 hex index or bit number of the parameter DI 2 r0722 2 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQHO 3 KLJK UG ZRUG 3 ORZ WK ZRUG 1 QG ZRUG 3DJH LQGH 3DUDPHWHU QXPEHU 6XELQGH 3DUDPHWHU YDOXH 3 VW ZRUG ULYH 2EMHFW QGH Figure 6 16 Telegram to assign DI 2 with ON OFF1 6 2 5 Communication via BACnet MS TP 6 2 5 1 BACnet properties Function description In BACnet components and systems are consid...

Page 183: ...PICS_CU230P 2_HVAC_v47_SP3 docx 6 2 5 2 Activating communication via fieldbus Function description Procedure Proceed as follows to activate communication via BACnet MS TP 1 Start quick commissioning 2 In the first steps of the quick commissioning confirm all of the values that have already been set 3 Select the default setting 54 USS control Default setting of the interfaces Page 82 4 In the next ...

Page 184: ...onverter power supply 3 Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark 4 Switch on the converter power supply again Your settings become active after switching on You have set the bus address Parameters Parameter Description Factory setting p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0 Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter 182 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB...

Page 185: ...onerter value changes an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification result is sent The factory setting 1 means that the converter sends an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification if the considered value e g for a range of 0 10 V changes by an absolute value 1 This requires an active SubscribeCOV_Service to send the relevant object instance You can also set the COV_In...

Page 186: ...alog outputs of the converter are internally interconnected with the fieldbus analog outputs p0771 0 791 0 p0771 1 791 1 The values for p0791 0 and p0791 1 are written via objects ANALOG OUTPUT 0 and ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Interconnections between parameter p0791 and other sources are rejected This means that the control outputs system specific values via the analog outputs of the converter However if yo...

Page 187: ...S RP B Data Sharing ReadProperty B ReadProperty DS RPM B Data Sharing ReadMultipleProperty B ReadPropertyMultiple DS WP B Data Sharing WriteProperty B WriteProperty DM DDB B Device Management Dynamic Device Binding B Who Is I Am DM DOB B Device Management Dynamic Object Binding B Who Has I Have DM DCC B Device Management DeviceCommuni cationControl B DeviceCommunicationControl DS COV B Data Sharin...

Page 188: ...on Max Master System_Status Protocol_Services_Supported Max Info Frames Vendor_Name Protocol_Object_Types_Supported Device Address Binding Vendor_Identifier Object_List Database Revision Model_Name Max_APDU_Length_Accepted 1 Firmware_Revision Segmentation_Supported 2 1 Length 480 2 not supported Object properties of other object types Object property Object type Binary In put Binary Out put Binary...

Page 189: ...e Parameter BI0 DI0 ACT State of DI 0 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 0 BI1 DI1 ACT State of DI 1 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 1 BI2 DI2 ACT State of DI 2 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 2 BI3 DI3 ACT State of DI 3 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 3 BI4 DI4 ACT State of DI 4 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 4 BI5 DI5 ACT State of DI 5 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 5 BI7 DI7 ACT State of AI 1 used as DI ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 11 BI8 DI8 ACT State of AI 2 ...

Page 190: ...he operator panel s Man ual operating mode has a higher priority than the BACnet override control ON OFF 0 1 R r2032 10 BV8 AT SET POINT Setpoint reached YES NO YES NO R r0052 8 BV9 AT MAX FREQ Maximum speed reached YES NO YES NO R r0052 10 BV10 DRIVE READY Converter ready YES NO YES NO R r0052 1 BV15 RUN COM ACT ACT indicates the status of the ON command regardless of the source YES NO 0 1 R r203...

Page 191: ...N LOCK C p0806 BV93 CTL OVER RIDE CMD Converter control using BACnet override control ON OFF 0 1 C r0054 10 Analog Input Objects In stance ID Object name Description Unit Range Access type Parameter AI0 ANALOG IN 0 AI0 input signal V mA converter depend ent R r0752 0 AI1 ANALOG IN 1 AI1 input signal V mA converter depend ent R r0752 1 AI2 ANALOG IN 2 AI2 input signal V mA converter depend ent R r0...

Page 192: ...converter depend ent R r0031 AV7 POWER Motor power kW converter depend ent R r0032 AV8 DRIVE TEMP Heat sink temperature C converter depend ent R r0037 AV9 MOTOR TEMP Measured or calculated motor temperature C converter depend ent R r0035 AV10 KWH NR Cumulative converter energy consumption cannot be reset kWh converter depend ent R r0039 AV12 INV RUN TIME Motor s operating hours is reset by enterin...

Page 193: ... down time s 0 00 999999 0 W p1121 AV34 CUR LIM Current limit A converter depend ent R p0640 AV39 ACT WARN Indication of a pending alarm converter depend ent R r2110 0 AV40 PREV WARN 1 Indication of the last alarm converter depend ent R r2110 1 AV41 PREV WARN 2 Indication of the last but one alarm converter depend ent R r2110 2 AV5000 RAMP UP TIME Technology controller ramp up time s 0 650 W p2257...

Page 194: ...1 Technology controller 1 actual value filter time constant s 0 60 W p11165 AV5203 DIFF TIME 1 Technology controller 1 differen tiation time constant s 0 60 W p11174 AV5204 PROP GAIN 1 Technology controller 1 propor tional gain s 0 1000 W p11180 AV5205 INTEG TIME 1 Technology controller integral time s 0 1000 W p11185 AV5206 OUTPUT MAX 1 Technology controller 1 maxi mum limiting 200 200 W p11191 A...

Page 195: ...R r0947 2 MSI3 FAULT_4 Fault number 4 R r0947 3 MSI4 FAULT_5 Fault number 5 R r0947 4 MSI5 FAULT_6 Fault number 6 R r0947 5 MSI6 FAULT_7 Fault number 7 R r0947 6 MSI7 FAULT_8 Fault number 8 R r0947 7 MSI8 WARNING_1 Warning num ber 1 R r2110 0 MS9 WARNING_2 Warning num ber 2 R r2110 1 MSI10 WARNING_3 Warning num ber 3 R r2110 2 MSI11 WARNING_4 Warning num ber 4 R r2110 3 MSI12 WARNING_5 Warning num...

Page 196: ...est via OSV0 Byte Description 2F h 0A h 80 h 01 h 01 h 01 h 10 h 01 h 0002 h 0000 h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function code 2F h 47 Request length 10 bytes 0A h Request reference 80 h Request identifier 1 h DO Id 1 Number of parameters 1 Attribute Number of elements 1 Parameter number 2 Subindex 0 If the request was successfully processed then you can read out the response precisely once from the...

Page 197: ...ameter content again via OSV1 Byte Description 2F h 00 h 0002 h 1 2 3 4 Function code 2F h 47 response length 0 error Error code 2 h Invalid State Overview of the error codes 1 h Invalid Length invalid length 2 h Invalid State action is not permitted in the actual converter state 3 h Invalid function Code FC 2 hex 4 h Response not ready the response has still not been issued 5 h Internal Error gen...

Page 198: ...switched over using the command data set is designated as follows In the parameter list with Dynamic index CDS Parameters Page 349 In the parameter overview with C It takes approximately 4 ms to toggle between command data sets Changing the number of command data sets 1 Set p0010 15 2 The number of command data sets is configured with p0170 3 Set p0010 0 You have changed the number of command data...

Page 199: ...ons apply when selecting the system of units p0505 1 System of units SI factory setting Torque Nm power kW temperature C or K p0505 2 Referred system of units SI Represented as p0505 3 US system of units Torque lbf ft power hp temperature F p0505 4 System of units referred US Represented as Special features The values for p0505 2 and for p0505 4 represented in the converter are identical However t...

Page 200: ... belong to different groups of units For each parameter you can find the associated unit group for scaling in the parameter list Example r0333 belongs to unit group 7_4 An overview of the unit groups and the possible physical units can also be found in the parameter list 6 2 7 2 Technological unit of the technology controller Options when selecting the technological unit p0595 defines in which tec...

Page 201: ...logical unit Unit group Additional technology controller 0 p11026 p11027 9_2 Additional technology controller 1 p11126 p11127 9_3 Additional technology controller 2 p11226 p11227 9_4 Additional information is provided in the parameter list Advanced commissioning 6 2 Drive control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 199 ...

Page 202: ...y system Simplify the control system Note The multi pump control function is not supported on G120XA converter variants of power rating 30 kW or above Precondition Before using the multi pump control function make sure that you have connected pumps of the same power rating Function description The converter uses four relays KP1 to KP4 which are connected to digital outputs DO 0 to DO 3 to switch p...

Page 203: ...sensor Interconnect the signal of the pressure sensor with the actual value input of the technology controller Figure 6 18 Mains circuit 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 Figure 6 19 External relay control circuit Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 201 ...

Page 204: ...ontrolled motor switches the speed setpoint to ESM setpoint source When activating the hibernation mode if the multi pump control is active the hibernation mode only works when there is only one operating motor and the conditions for hibernation are satisfied 6 3 1 1 Pump switch in switch out Pump switch in If the pump controlled by the converter runs at the maximum speed p1082 and the PID error r...

Page 205: ...east absolute operating hours p29530 0 3 E E E F F D D LW 0RWRU 0RWRU 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VZLWFK LQ GHOD 2YHUFRQWURO WKUHVKROG 6ZLWFK LQ WKUHVKROG 0D LPXP VSHHG SDVV FRQWURO FRPPDQG SDVV FRQWURO VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VWDWXV ZRUG HE SDVV GHOD WLPH 3 HUURU LW RQGLWLRQV IRU SXPS VZLWFK LQ LW LW ULYHQ LQH ULYHQ S W W W W W W S S I IBDFW S S 3 ุ S W S S S S S S S S U U 3 U Figure 6 20 Pump swit...

Page 206: ...xed sequence The converters first switches off a pump OFF2 which runs in converter operation following the sequence M4 M3 M2 M1 and then captures a running pump and switches it from line operation to converter operation p29522 1 Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours The converter first switches out the pump with the most absolute operating hours p29530 0 3 If the pump with the m...

Page 207: ...VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VZLWFK RXW GHOD HE SDVV GHOD WLPH S S S S S U W S S W W W W W S S 3 S I S S U U D E F S 3 ื S W S IBDFW S S D F E S ULYHQ LQH ULYHQ Figure 6 21 Pump switch out based on the fixed sequence p29522 0 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 205 ...

Page 208: ... multi pump control function make sure that the motor quantity set in p29521 matches with the quantity of digital outputs mapped in r29529 Otherwise there will be error A52966 and A07929 Note Pump switch in switch out interrupted when p29528 p1080 p1082 If p29528 p1080 p1082 there is possibility that the conditions for switch in and switch out will be met simutaneously As a result the system will ...

Page 209: ...ol variable speed motor p29546 Multi pump control deviation threshold 20 For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 6 3 1 2 Stop mode Function description Two stop modes are available as follows Normal stop All pumps running in line operation are switched off simultaneously as soon as the stop command is received The pump in converter operation stops under the contro...

Page 210: ...d off with normal stop Note Sequence stop During sequence stop the motors are switched off in the reverse sequence in which they are switched on It is therefore important that the motor configuration parameter p29521 is not changed while the converter is running Otherwise the parameter value may no longer correspond to the mapping of the motors connected Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SIN...

Page 211: ... 2 S S S S S 2 2 2 2 Figure 6 23 Stop mode Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29533 Multi pump control switch off sequence 0 p29537 Multi pump control disconnection lockout time 0 s r29538 Multi pump control variable speed motor For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 ...

Page 212: ... pump The internal counters p29530 0 3 and p29547 0 3 are used to calculate the operating hours of the pumps p29522 0 Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence The converter first switches out the pump with the most continuous operating hours p29547 0 3 and then switches in a pump following the sequence of M1 M2 M3 M4 p29522 1 Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours ...

Page 213: ...HQ ULYHQ ULYHQ 6ZLWFKRYHU 6ZLWFKRYHU Figure 6 24 Pump switchover Note Possible alarms and faults With pump switchover enabled if the continuous operating hours p29547 of the pump exceed the threshold p29531 while the pump switchover is not possible r29529 6 1 alarm A52962 appears In this case incease p29531 or reset p29547 to clear the alarm Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA ...

Page 214: ...work in service mode respectively Pumps in service mode are skipped in further multi pump control process WARNING Risk of electric shock due to incorrectly connected low voltage circuit breakers If a low voltage circuit breaker is not connected correctly to a pump set in service mode hazardous voltages can be present at the pump when the converter relay malfunctions Troubleshooting the service pum...

Page 215: ...W LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW 6HUYLFH LQH LQH LQH LQH LQH LQH LQH ULYHQ ULYHQ ULYHQ ULYHQ ULYHQ ULYHQ ULYHQ LQH 6HUYLFH 6HUYLFH 6HUYLFH LQH S S S W W W U U U W S U W U W U W Figure 6 25 Service mode Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 213 ...

Page 216: ...le alarms and faults see Section List of fault codes and alarm codes Page 753 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29540 Multi pump control service mode enable 0 p29542 BO CO Multi pump control service mode interlock manually p29543 0 3 BI Multi pump control motor under repair 0 p29542 0 1 p29542 1 2 p29542 2 3 p29542 3 r29544 Multi pump control index of motors under repair For more information...

Page 217: ...er each power up to avoid hammer effect to the pipe If the pipe filling is interrupted for example fault occurs the function continues after the converter is recovered This function is used in horizontal vertical and mixed piping systems Precondition Before enabling the pipe filling make sure that p1143 r29640 0 and p1144 r29641 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Ope...

Page 218: ...g to the PID feedback from the pressure sensor The filling stops when the actual pressure r2272 the threshold p29614 for a specified time p29615 S 3LSH ILOOLQJ PRQLWRULQJ WLPH 3UHVVXUH 3LSH ILOOLQJ WKUHVKROG 3LSH ILOOLQJ VSHHG 6SHHG 2SHUDWLRQ S W S W Note Priority of frost protection condensation protection deragging and pipe filling The priority of functions is as follows frost protection condens...

Page 219: ... speed 900 rpm p29613 Pipe filling time 50 s p29614 Pipe filling threshold 10 p29615 Pipe filling monitoring time 0 s For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 217 ...

Page 220: ...bles frost protection function while OFF1 enables this function again OFF2 fault The motor stops and the frost protection function is deactivated DXOW 6SHHG S 2 21 2 2 2 2 2 S W Note Frost protection can not run when Operator Panels BOP 2 or IOP 2 or G120 Smart Access gets control of the motor Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29622 BI Frost protection enable 0 p29623 Frost protection speed ...

Page 221: ...iption OFF1 OFF3 OFF3 disables the condensation protection function while OFF1 enables this function again OFF2 fault The motor stops and the condensation protection function is deactivated W DXOW RXW 6SHHG 2 2 2 2 S S 21 2 2 If the converter is not running and the protection signal becomes active protection measure is applied as follows If frost protection speed p29623 0 default 0 frost protectio...

Page 222: ...otection enable 0 p29624 Condensation protection current 30 For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SINAMICS G120XA converter 220 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 223: ... DYLWDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ HQDEOH 3 6FDOHG IHHGEDFN 6WDWXV ZRUG ELW 3 PLQLPXP OLPLW UHDFKHG 6WDWXV ZRUG ELW 3 PD LPXP OLPLW UHDFKHG 6WDWXV ZRUG ELW 3 LQYHUWHU UXQQLQJ DYLWDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ GHOD 3 HQDEOH GLVDEOH DYLWDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ WKUHVKROG 7ULJJHU ZDUQLQJ 7ULJJHU IDXOW DYLWDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ GLVDEOHG S S U U U V U 7 ุ S S Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29625 Cavitation protection enable 0 p2962...

Page 224: ...he motors Parameter p29590 is used to select the deragging mode p29590 1 enabled on first run after power up p29590 2 enabled on every run p29590 3 enabled with a Binector input p29591 6SHHG W 5DPS XS WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH 5HYHUVH VHWSRLQW RUZDUG VHWSRLQW 1XPEHU RI GHUDJJLQJ F FOHV 5HYHUVH WLPH RUZDUG WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH 5DPS XS WLPH S S S S S S S S S 21 2 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p295...

Page 225: ...bout the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 Interaction with other functions Deragging signal is ignored if the converter is restarted under the command of essential service mode bypass operation automatic restart hibernation mode or multi pump switching in Deragging is interrupted if essential service mode bypass or hibernation mode is activated Advanced commissioning 6 3 Pump control SIN...

Page 226: ...he main setpoint Converter fieldbus interface Analog input of the converter Motorized potentiometer emulated in the converter Fixed setpoints saved in the converter You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary setpoint Under the following conditions the converter switches from the main setpoint to other setpoints When the technology controller is active and ap...

Page 227: ...as setpoint source Parameter Description p1070 755 0 Interconnects main setpoint with analog input 0 p1075 755 0 Interconnects supplementary setpoint with analog input 0 Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0755 0 1 CO CU analog inputs actual value in percent p1070 C CI Main setpoint Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Suppl...

Page 228: ... Parameter Description p1070 2050 1 Interconnects the main setpoint with the receive word PZD02 from the fieldbus p1075 2050 1 Interconnects the supplementary setpoint with receive word PZD02 from the field bus Parameters Number Name Factory setting p1070 C CI Main setpoint Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Supplementary setp...

Page 229: ...FDOLQJ 6FDOLQJ 6XSSOHPHQWDU VHWSRLQW S S S S S U U S U Figure 6 29 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source 023 ORZHU 023 UDLVH QPD QPD 6HWSRLQW 21 2 S U S S S S W W W W Figure 6 30 Function chart of the motorized potentiometer Example Setting with the motorized potentiometer as setpoint source Parameter Description p1070 1050 Interconnects the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer outp...

Page 230: ... VHW WR WKH VDYHG YDOXH 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV QRW VDYHG DQG DIWHU 21 LV HQWHUHG XVLQJ S 6DYH LQ 195 0 DFWLYH QLWLDO URXQGLQJ RII DFWLYH XWRPDWLF PRGH 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU DFWLYH DWD VDYH DFWLYH USP 0RW SRWL VHWSRLQW 0RS UDPS XS WLPH 0RS UDPS GRZQ WLPH 0RW3 DFF VHW YDO 0RS VHW YDO 0RS QBVHW EHI 5 USP 0RS PDQXDO DXWR 0RS DXWR VHWSRLQW 0RW3 LQY 67 VHWSRLQW FKDQ 67 VHWSRLQ...

Page 231: ...Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Supplementary setpoint 0 p1076 C CI Supplementary setpoint scaling 1 Table 6 44 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer Number Name Factory setting p1030 D Motorized potentiometer configuration 0000 0110 bin p1037 D Motorized potentiometer maximum speed 0 rpm p1038 D Motorized potentiometer...

Page 232: ...LRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW HIIHFWLYH L HG VHWSRLQW U S S S S S S S S Figure 6 33 Direct selection of the fixed speed setpoint Table 6 45 Resulting setpoint p1020 p1021 p1022 p1023 Resulting setpoint 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 p1001 0 1 0 0 p1002 1 1 0 0 p1001 p1002 0 0 1 0 p1003 1 ...

Page 233: ...LQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW HIIHFWLYH L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW U S S S S S S S S S Figure 6 34 Binary selection of the fixed speed setpoint Table 6 46 Resulting setpoint p1020 p1021 p1022 p1023 Resulting setpoint 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 p1001 0 1 0 0 p1002 1 1 0 0 p1003 0 0 1 0 p1004 1 0 1 0 p1005 0 1 1 0 p1006 1 1 1 0 p1007 0 0 0 1 p1008 1 0 0 1 p1009 0 1 0 1 p1010 1 1 0 ...

Page 234: ...HFWLRQ 6SHHG IL HG VHWSRLQW USP L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQWV ELQDU VHOHFWLRQ S 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S U U U U U U U U S S S S S U U Figure 6 35 FP 3010 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120XA converter 232 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 235: ...SRLQW ELW L HG VHWSRLQW ELW QBVHWSBIL VWDWXV 6SHHG IL HG VHWS USP L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQWV GLUHFW VHOHFWLRQ S 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO S S S S S U U U U U U U U S S S S U U Figure 6 36 FP 3011 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 233 ...

Page 236: ... CO Fixed speed setpoint 14 0 rpm p1015 D CO Fixed speed setpoint 15 0 rpm p1016 Fixed speed setpoint selection mode 1 p1020 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 0 p1021 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1 0 p1022 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2 0 p1023 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3 0 r1024 Fixed speed setpoint active rpm r1025 0 Fixed speed setpoint status p1070 C CI Main set...

Page 237: ...g the motor to operate briefly at specific speeds The Speed limitation function protects the motor and the driven load against excessively high speeds The Ramp function generator function prevents the setpoint from suddenly changing As a consequence the motor accelerates and brakes with a reduced torque QKLELW GLUHFWLRQ RI URWDWLRQ QYHUW 6NLS IUHTXHQF EDQGV 6HWSRLQW IRU PRWRU FRQWURO URP VHWSRLQW ...

Page 238: ...ing how a setpoint is inverted Parameter Description p1113 722 1 Digital input 1 0 Setpoint remains unchanged Digital input 1 1 Converter inverts the setpoint p1113 2090 11 Inverts the setpoint via the fieldbus control word 1 bit 11 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p1113 C BI Setpoint inversion Dependent on the converter Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G1...

Page 239: ... rotation Set parameter p1111 1 to permanently inhibit the positive direction of rotation Parameters Table 6 48 Application examples for inhibiting and enabling the direction of rotation Number Name Factory setting p1110 BI Inhibit negative direction 1 p1111 BI Inhibit positive direction 0 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions...

Page 240: ...tion within a specific speed range Function description Minimum speed 0LQLPXP VSHHG W 0 S Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible when the motor is accelerating or braking Skip frequency bands Further information on the skip frequency bands is provided in the function block diagram Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120XA...

Page 241: ...XEVHTXHQW UXQ XS 9DOXH RI S LV OLPLWHG WR PD LPXP PRWRU VSHHG S QBOLPLW QHJ HII USP QBOLPLW SRV HII USP QBVHW DIW PLQBOLP USP QBOLPLW SRV QBOLPLW QHJ 6HWS DIWHU OLPLW USP VNLS VSHHG RI GHDFWLYDWHV WKH VNLS EDQG 0D LPXP OLPLWLQJ DFWLYH LPLWLQJ WR QHJDWLYH YDOXHV 5HIHUHQFH YDOXH IRU WKH UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6NLS IUHTXHQF EDQGV DQG VSHHG OLPLWDWLRQV 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO U S U Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S S S S...

Page 242: ... limit rpm r1114 CO Setpoint after direction limiting rpm r1119 CO Ramp function generator setpoint at the input rpm r1170 CO Speed controller setpoint sum rpm Further information is provided in the parameter list Parameters Page 349 NOTICE Incorrect direction of motor rotation if the parameterization is not suitable If you are using an analog input as speed setpoint source then for a setpoint 0 V...

Page 243: ...rection Parameters Table 6 50 Parameters for the speed limitation Number Name Factory setting p1082 D Maximum speed 1500 rpm p1083 D CO Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm p1085 C CI Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083 p1086 D CO Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 210000 rpm p1088 C CI Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 1086 Advanced commis...

Page 244: ...n generator The ramp up and ramp down times of the extended ramp function generator can be set independently of each other The optimal times depend on the application and can lie in the range from a few 100 ms to several minutes 5DPS XS WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH IIHFWLYH UDPS XS WLPH IIHFWLYH UDPS GRZQ WLPH 0D LPXP VSHHG W W W Initial and final rounding permit smooth jerk free acceleration and braking T...

Page 245: ...7L 7I 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU VWDWXV ELWV 5DPS GRZQ DFWLYH 5DPS XS DFWLYH 2WKHU VWDWXV ELWV 5 DFFHOHUDWLRQ UHY Vt QDEOH UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 2 HQG URXQGLQJ QWHUQDO TXLFN VWRS 5DPS IODWWHQLQJ RII UHH H UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6HWWLQJ YDOXH 5RXQG RII W SH FFHSW VHWLQJ YDOXH QWHUQDO TXLFN VWRS QWHUQDO 5 HQDEOH UHH H UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6HWSRLQW USP 6SHHG VHWSRLQW HQDEOH SDVV UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQH...

Page 246: ... function generator setting value 0 p1144 C CI Ramp function generator setting value 0 p1148 D Ramp function generator tolerance for ramp up and ramp down active 19 8 rpm r1149 CO Ramp function generator acceleration Further information is provided in the parameter list Setting the extended ramp function generator Procedure 1 Enter the highest possible speed setpoint 2 Switch on the motor 3 Evalua...

Page 247: ...oling and lubrication when the pump speed is too low The initial ramp up accelerates the pump to the minimum speed to reduce the wear and tear The long ramp time in the effective speed range improves the control accuracy for the pump and fan The ramp down decelerates the pump from the minimum speed to stop and thus reduces the shock to the valve Precondition Before enabling the dual ramp function ...

Page 248: ...9573 DDS Ramp down scaling 1 100 p29574 DDS Threshold speed 3 30 rmp p29575 DDS Ramp down scaling 2 100 r29576 CO Ramp up scaling output r29577 CO Ramp down scaling output p29578 CDS Ramp up scaling input p29579 CDS Ramp down scaling input p29580 BI Dual ramp enable 0 For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 349 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Setpoints and setpoint process...

Page 249: ...r as a level controller Precondition Additional functions The U f control or the vector control have been set Tools To change the function settings you can use an operator panel for example Function description Function diagram The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller controller with proportional integral and derivative action 3 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller ...

Page 250: ...sly satisfied The technology controller supplies the main setpoint p2251 0 The ramp function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value Figure 6 41 Simplified representation of the technology controller Basic settings The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram Interconnect setpoint and actual values with signals of your choi...

Page 251: ...oaches the setpoint Increase the proportional component KP p2280 and reduce the integration time TI p2285 W The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight oscillation Increase the proportional component KP p2280 and reduce the rate time Td p2274 W The actual value quickly approaches the setpoint but over shoots too much Decrease the proportional component KP p2280 and increase th...

Page 252: ... 7HFBFWU IL YDO 7HFBFWU IL YDO 7HFBFWUO IL YDO 7HFBFWU L 9DO 6 7HFBFWU L 9DO HII 7HFBFWUO 1R DFW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW L HG YDOXH VHOHFWLRQ ELQDU S 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S S U U U U S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Figure 6 42 FP 7950 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA converter 250 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0...

Page 253: ... 9DO HII 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW L HG YDOXH VHOHFWLRQ GLUHFW S 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S S U U U S S S S Figure 6 43 FP 7951 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 251 ...

Page 254: ...HQWHUHG DIWHU 21 2 HQDEOH PLVVLQJ 2OG YDOXH LV NHSW 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV VDYHG LQ D QRQ YRODWLOH IDVKLRQ IRU S 1RQ YRODWLOH GDWD VDYH QRW DFWLYDWHG LWK LQLWLDO URXQGLQJ 7KH UDPS XS GRZQ WLPH VHW LV H FHHGHG DFFRUGLQJO LWKRXW LQLWLDO URXQGLQJ 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV VDYHG DIWHU 2 DQG DIWHU 21 LV HQWHUHG XVLQJ U 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQW...

Page 255: ... QBOLPLW QHJ HII USP QBOLPLW SRV HII USP 7HFBFWUORXWS BVLJ 7HFKBFWUO DFWVFDO 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWUO DFW YDO 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWU LQWHJ KROG 7HFKBFWUO OLP RIIV FRPSRQHQW VWRS RQO ZKHQ U DQG U LQ VDPH GLUHFWLRQ IWHU HQDEOH RI WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU WKH VWDUW YDOXH LV SUHVHQW DV ORQJ DV WKH 5 RXWSXW UHDFKHV WKLV YDOXH 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWU DFW DIW OW 7HFBFWUO HQDEOH 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWUO PLQB...

Page 256: ...nology controller system deviation p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0 s p2280 Technology controller proportional gain See parameter list p2285 Technology controller integral time See parameter list p2286 BI Hold technology controller integrator 56 13 p2289 C CI Technology controller precontrol signal 0 p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion 0 p2339 Technolo...

Page 257: ... 0 r2272 CO Technology controller actual value scaled Table 6 55 PID technology controller fixed values binary selection Number Name Factory setting p2201 D CO Technology controller fixed value 1 10 p2202 D CO Technology controller fixed value 2 20 p2203 D CO Technology controller fixed value 3 30 p2204 D CO Technology controller fixed value 4 40 p2205 D CO Technology controller fixed value 5 50 p...

Page 258: ...tiometer setpoint memory p2235 C BI Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint raise 0 p2236 C BI Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint lower 0 p2237 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value 100 p2238 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum val ue 100 p2240 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer start value 0 r2245 CO Techn...

Page 259: ...oop air discharge control https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 77490904 Closed loop fan control for a stairwell https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 77491576 Closed loop fan control for a parking garage or a tunnel https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 77491575 Pressure controlled pump https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 43297279 Level controlled pum...

Page 260: ...r interrupts the connection between the PID technology controller and the speed controller Instead of the PID technology controller output the autotuning function specifies the speed setpoint 3XPS 0RWRU FRQWURO FWXDO YDOXH LOOLQJ OHYHO VHWSRLQW 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 3 DXWRWXQLQJ 6SHHG VHWSRLQW 3 Figure 6 46 Autotuning using closed loop level control as example The speed setpoint results from the te...

Page 261: ... p2274 and p2285 If the converter signals fault F07445 If possible double p2354 and p2355 Repeat the autotuning with the changed parameters 4 Back up the calculated values so that they are protected against power failure e g using the BOP 2 OPTIONS RAM ROM You have auto tuned the PID controller Parameters Number Name Factory setting p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0 0 s p...

Page 262: ...er controller setting than for p2350 1 with larger overshoot of the controlled variable W 3 Slower controller setting than for p2350 1 Overshoot of the controlled variable is to a large extent avoided W 4 Controller setting after completion of the autotuning as for p2350 1 Optimize only the P and I action of the PID con troller W 0 p2354 PID autotuning monitoring time 240 s p2355 PID autotuning of...

Page 263: ...ation Function description 3 DGDSWDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ RQILJXUDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ 3 FRPSRQHQW RI WKH WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 7 DGDSWDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ S S S S S S S S S S S 3 7 S S S S S S Figure 6 48 Controller adaptation Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 261 ...

Page 264: ...SW VFDO VBV 7Q DGDSW ORZHU YDO 7Q DGDSW XSSHU YDO S DGDSW ORZHU YDO S DGDSW XSSHU YDO S DGDSW LQS VBVUF 7Q DGDSW LQS VBVUF S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S U U S S S S S S S Figure 6 49 FP 7959 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA converter 262 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 265: ...ler upper Kp adaptation transition point 100 p2315 CI Technology controller Kp adaptation scaling signal source 1 r2316 CO Technology controller Kp adaptation output p2317 CI Technology controller Tn adaptation input value signal source 0 p2318 Technology controller lower Tn adaptation value 3 s p2319 Technology controller upper Tn adaptation value 10 s p2320 Technology controller lower Tn adaptat...

Page 266: ...nology controllers allow several process variables to be simultaneously controlled using one converter Example An HVAC system with heating and cooling valves to process the air The main controller controls the speed of the fan drive The additional technology controllers control the cooling and heating via the two analog outputs Parameters Table 6 58 Parameters for the free technology controller 0 ...

Page 267: ... constant Td 0 s p11080 Free tec_ctrl 0 proportional gain KP 1 p11085 Free tec_ctrl 0 integral time TI 30 s p11091 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit 100 p11092 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit 0 p11093 Free tec_ctrl 0 ramp up ramp down time limit 1 s r11094 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal p11097 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit signal source 11091 0 p11098 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit signal s...

Page 268: ...Cascade control for the pressure in a liquid pipe Depending on the set actual variance of the technology controller the cascade control of the converter switches a maximum of three additional motors directly to the line supply via contactors Precondition To deploy the cascade control you must activate the technology controller Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA conver...

Page 269: ...4 has expired The converter brakes the speed controlled motor with ramp down time p1121 to the activation deactivation speed p2378 Until the activation deactivation speed p2378 is attained the converter deactivates the technology controller temporarily 4 After switch on delay p2384 the converter connects an uncontrolled motor Deactivate uncontrolled motors M1 M3 RQWURO GHYLDWLRQ 0RWRU 0Q LV FRQQHF...

Page 270: ... Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 1 MD 2 MD 3 MD 1 M1 M1 2 M1 M1 M2 M1 M2 3 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 4 M1 M1 M2 M1 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 5 M1 M3 M1 M3 M1 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 6 M1 M2 M1 M2 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 7 M1 M1 M2 M3 M1 M3 M1 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 8 M1 M2 M3 M1 M3 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 M1 M2 M3 Parameter Parameter Description Factory setting p2200 Technology controller enable 0 p2251 Technology controller ...

Page 271: ...you must make the following settings in the cascade control p2392 p2373 The restart value of the hibernation mode p2392 must be lower than the activation threshold for the cascade control p2373 p2373 p2376 The activation threshold for the cascade control p2373 must be lower than the overload threshold for the cascade control p2376 It is not permissible for the main drive to be in the hibernation m...

Page 272: ...find programs to convert from UTC to RTC e g UTC to RTC http unixtime converter com Example Saved as alarm time in the alarm buffer r2123 0 2345 ms r2145 0 14580 days Number of seconds 2345 1000 14580 86400 1259712002 Converting this number of seconds to RTC provides the date 02 12 2009 01 00 02 The times specified for alarms and faults always refer to standard time Function and settings The real ...

Page 273: ...p8402 0 8 RTC daylight saving time setting 0 r8403 RTC daylight saving time actual difference r8404 RTC weekday p8405 Activate deactivate RTC alarm A01098 1 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Technology controller SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 271 ...

Page 274: ...XW 21 21 21 21 7 ZHHNGD DFWLYDWLRQ 7 VZLWFKLQJ WLPHV 57 S S U Figure 6 54 Example of the response of the time switch Settings for the example with DTC1 Enable parameterization of the DTC p8409 0 As long as the parameterization of the DTC is enabled the converter holds the output of all three DTC r84x3 x 1 2 3 r84x3 0 normal r84x3 1 inverted status message at LOW Activate deactivate the weekday p84...

Page 275: ... the motor data identification the converter assumes a cable resistance 20 of the stator resistance of the cold motor Function description You must correctly set the components between the converter and motor to achieve an optimum closed loop control quality Procedure 1 Set p0010 2 2 Set the cable resistance in p0352 3 Set p0230 to the appropriate value 4 Set p0235 to the appropriate value 5 Set p...

Page 276: ... the U f control The U f control is a speed feedforward control with the following properties The converter sets the output voltage on the basis of the U f characteristic The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of pole pairs of the motor The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus increases the speed accuracy The ...

Page 277: ...possible output voltage of the converter depends on the line voltage The converter can increase the output frequency even at the maximum output voltage The motor is then operated with field weakening The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency also depends on the following variables The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency p0310 also depends on the following va...

Page 278: ...ses with the speed Centrifugal pumps radi al fans axial fans com pressors Lower losses in the motor and converter than with the linear characteristic Parabolic p1300 2 Table 6 61 Characteristics for special applications Requirement Application examples Remark Characteristic Parameter Applications with a low dynamic re sponse and con stant speed Centrifugal pumps radi al fans axial fans The ECO mod...

Page 279: ...6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH FDOFXODWLRQ O LQJ UHVWDUW PRGH 9GFBFWUO FRQILJ 8BRXWSXW 9UPV 2XWSXW YROWDJH 9UPV 2XWSXW IUHTXHQF IBRXWS BPD BFWUO 8BRXWS 9UPV 6SHHG VHWSRLQW VXP USP 5 VHWS DW LQS USP IBVHW BPD 30 BPD UHGXFWLRQ 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU YROWDJH FRQWURO PD FORVHG ORRS IUHTXHQF FRQWURO PD FORVHG ORRS 8 I FRQWURO RYHUYLHZ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U U 0 ದ S S U U U U U U U U S S S S S S S U U U U U ...

Page 280: ...equency 0 Hz p1300 D Open loop closed loop control operating mode See parameter list p1333 D U f control FCC starting frequency 0 Hz p1334 D U f control slip compensation starting frequency 0 Hz p1335 D Slip compensation scaling 0 p1338 D U f mode resonance damping gain 0 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor control SINAMICS G120XA converter 278 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 281: ...ng the voltage boost for U f control The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 p1312 5DWHG PRWRU IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH S S U S S 8 I Figure 6 58 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example Increase parameter values p1310 p1312 in steps of 5 Excessively high values in p1310 p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off tr...

Page 282: ...motor follows the setpoint 6 If necessary increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem In applications with a high break loose torque you must also increase parameter p1312 in order to achieve a satisfactory motor response You have set the voltage boost Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor control SINAMICS G120XA converter 280 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E4...

Page 283: ... DFW 6 FO ORRS FWUO 0RW BUDWHG 6 FO ORRS FWUO 5 6 2S FO OS FWUOBPRGH 9ROWDJH PD 9UPV 9ROWDJH PD 9UPV S LV RQO DFWLYH DW WKH ILUVW DFFHOHUDWLRQ DIWHU WKH PRWRU LV VZLWFKHG RQ IBVHW 3DUDEROLF 2 0RGH OX FXUUHQW FRQWURO LQHDU 8 I FRQWURO FKDUDFWHULVWLF DQG YROWDJH ERRVW 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U S S S S U S 0 S S 0 U U U U U S U U U U S U U Figure 6 59 FP 6301 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor contr...

Page 284: ...W UPV I S WKH OLPLW LV y I 0RW 1ื 8 I VOLS FRPSHQVDWLRQ 8 I UHVRQDQFH GDPSLQJ 8 I FRQWURO 5HVRQDQFH GDPSLQJ DQG VOLS FRPSHQVDWLRQ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U U 0 U 0 U S U U S S U S S PV U I I 0RW 1 I I 0RW 1 S S PV ದ Figure 6 60 FP 6310 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor control SINAMICS G120XA converter 282 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 285: ...urrent voltage boost permanent 50 p1311 D Starting current voltage boost when accelerating 0 p1312 D Starting current voltage boost when starting 0 Further information is provided in the parameter list Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 283 ...

Page 286: ...reasing speed the converter changes from closed loop starting current control to U f control with load dependent voltage boost The slip compensation is activated Soft starting is not possible Reduced setting options Function description Characteristics after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control IVHW 8VHW IVHW TBVHW TBVHW 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH 7HFKQRORJLFDO DSSOLFDWLRQ 5DWHG PRWR...

Page 287: ... of the speed Eccentric worm pump compressor Linear p0501 0 The required torque increa ses with the speed Centrifugal pumps radial fans axial fans Lower losses in the motor and con verter than with the linear charac teristic Parabol ic p0501 1 Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0025 CO Output voltage smoothed Vrms r0066 CO Output frequency Hz r0071 Output voltage maximum Vrms p0310 M Rated mo...

Page 288: ...vior of the motor Precondition The ramp up time of the ramp function generator is depending on the motor rated power 1 s 1 kW 10 s 10 kW Function description Starting current boost after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control 5DWHG PRWRU IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH S S S U S S 8 I Figure 6 63 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example The converter boo...

Page 289: ...In applications with a high break loose torque you must also increase parameter p1312 in order to achieve a satisfactory motor response You have set the voltage boost Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0071 Output voltage maximum Vrms p0310 M Rated motor frequency 0 Hz p0320 M Rated motor magnetizing current short circuit current 0 Arms p1310 D Starting current voltage boost permanent 50 p131...

Page 290: ...red Figure 6 64 Simplified function diagram for sensorless vector control with speed controller Using the motor model the converter calculates the following closed loop control signals from the measured phase currents and the output voltage Current component Iq Current component Iq Speed actual value The setpoint of the current component Id flux setpoint is obtained from the motor data For speeds ...

Page 291: ... the connection type Y Δ and carry out the motor data identification routine at standstill Speed limits and torque limits In the quick commissioning set the maximum speed p1082 and current limit p0640 to match your particular application When exiting quick commissioning the converter calculates the torque and power limits corresponding to the current limit The actual torque limits are obtained fro...

Page 292: ... FRQWURO 6 2SHUDWLRQ QDEOH VSHHG FRQWUROOHU 0BPD ORZHU HII 1P 0BPD XSSHU HII 1P QBVHW BFRPS QB QBDFW 7BV 6 FWXDO VSHHG USP QBDFW VPRRWK USP QBFWUO QBVHW USP QBFWUO V V GHY USP QDPLF UHGXFWLRQ ILHOG ZHDNHQLQJ XWRPDWLF S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ DFWLYH QBFWUO FRQILJ S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ DFWLYH QBFWUO FRQILJ URP S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ SBQBDGDSW 7QBQBDGDSW 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF 6SHHG FRQWUROOHU 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO 6 Q...

Page 293: ...HU WUDQVLWLRQ SRLQW WKH S DGDSWDWLRQ DOVR FKDQJHV RYHU 6SHHG GHSHQGHQW SBQ 7QBQ DGDSWDWLRQ 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF SBQBDGDSW 7QBQBDGDSW SBQ 7QBQ DGDSWDWLRQ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO 7Q S S PLQ S PLQ S S U 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF Q Q Q S Figure 6 66 FP 6050 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Motor control SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 291 ...

Page 294: ...WUO 0BDFFHO 1P 0BDFFHO 7BVPRRWK 0BDFFHO 1P FFHOHUDWLRQ FRQWURO LV LQKLELWHG IRU S PV 1R SUH FRQWURO LI WKH 9GF FRQWUROOHU LV DFWLYH 7KH VLJQDO LV RQO HIIHFWLYH DIWHU PDJQHWL DWLRQ KDV EHHQ FRPSOHWHG U 0BPD ORZHU HII 1P 0BPD XSSHU HII 1P DOFXODWHG DFFHOHUDWLQJ WRUTXH 7RUTXH VHWSRLQW 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO S S U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U S PV U U U ุ Figure 6 67 FP 6060 Advanced co...

Page 295: ...nto opera tion Complete 6 6 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller Optimum control response post optimization not required Preconditions for assessing the controller response The moment of inertia of the load is constant and does not depend on the speed The converter does not reach the set torque limits during acceleration You operate the motor in the range 40 60 of its rated speed If the motor exhib...

Page 296: ...accelerate When necessary adapt the ramp up and ramp down times of the ramp function generator p1120 and p1121 Procedure 1 Switch on the motor 2 Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 of the rated speed 3 Wait until the actual speed has stabilized 4 Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60 of the rated speed 5 Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed 6 Optimize...

Page 297: ... with an adequate dynamic performance then increase p1470 gain KP step by step Parameters Table 6 63 Encoderless speed control Number Name Factory setting p0342 M Ratio between the total and motor moments of inertia 1 p1452 Speed controller actual speed value smoothing time enco derless 10 ms p1470 D Speed controller encoderless operation P gain 0 3 p1472 D Speed controller encoderless operation i...

Page 298: ...process regenerative power Disadvantages significant increase in the motor temperature no defined braking characteristics no constant braking torque no braking torque at standstill braking energy E is lost as heat does not function when the power fails Compound braking One version of DC braking The converter brakes the motor with a defined ramp down time and superimposes a DC current on the output...

Page 299: ...tors 4 different events initiate DC braking DC braking when falling below a starting speed EUDNLQJ DFWLYH 2 6WDUW VSHHG 7LPH LQWHUYDO Q S W W Precondition p1230 1 and p1231 14 Function 1 The motor speed has exceeded the starting speed 2 The converter activates the DC braking as soon as the motor speed falls below the starting speed DC braking when a fault occurs EUDNLQJ DFWLYH 2 2 6WDUW VSHHG DXOW...

Page 300: ...he higher level control switches off the motor OFF1 or OFF3 2 The motor brakes along the down ramp to the speed for the start of DC braking 3 DC braking starts Parameters Settings for DC braking Number Name Factory setting p0347 M Motor de excitation time 0 s p1230 C BI DC braking activation 0 p1231 M Configuring DC braking 0 p1232 M DC braking braking current 0 Arms p1233 M DC braking duration 1 ...

Page 301: ...d prevents an excessive increase in the DC link voltage Note Compound braking is possible only with the U f control Compound braking does not operate in the following cases The flying restart function is active DC braking is active Vector control is selected NOTICE Overheating of the motor due to compound braking The motor will overheat if you use compound braking too frequently or for too long Th...

Page 302: ...his case the average pulse frequency is equal to the setpoint pulse frequency The pulse frequency can be varied in every current controller cycle if the cycle is constant Current measurement errors resulting from asynchronous pulse and control intervals are compensated by a correction in the actual current value Parameter p1811 0 n can be set to adjust the magnitude of variation in the pulse frequ...

Page 303: ...returns to the permissible range again If the motor current reaches the current limit during deceleration the I max controller extends the deceleration operation Parameters You only have to change the factory settings of the I max controller if the drive tends to oscillate when it reaches the current limit or if it is shut down due to overcurrent Table 6 66 I max controller parameters Number Name ...

Page 304: ...escription Overload response for p0290 0 The converter responds depending on the control mode that has been set In vector control the converter reduces the output current In U f control the converter reduces the speed Once the overload condition has been removed the converter re enables the output current or speed If the measure cannot prevent a converter thermal overload then the converter switch...

Page 305: ...he converter reduces the speed Once the overload condition has been removed the converter re enables the output current or speed If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024 Overload response for p0290 3 If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency then the converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at ...

Page 306: ...es off the motor with fault F30024 Overload response for p0290 13 We recommend this setting for drives with a high starting torque If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency then the converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800 There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint Once the overload condition has bee...

Page 307: ...mperature monitoring The converter uses a KTY sensor to evaluate the motor temperature in the range from 48 C 248 C Set the temperature for the alarm and fault thresholds with parameter p0604 or p0605 Overtemperature alarm A07910 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Overtemperature fault F07011 The converter responds with a fault in the following cases motor temperature p0605 motor temperature p060...

Page 308: ...rature alarm A07910 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Overtemperature fault F07011 The converter responds with a fault in the following cases motor temperature p0605 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Sensor monitoring A07015 or F07016 Wire break The converter interprets a resistance 2120 Ω as a wire break and outputs the alarm A07015 After 100 milliseconds the converter changes to the fault st...

Page 309: ...ุ W U S S S S S S U L U Figure 6 70 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors Parameters Table 6 67 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors Number Name Factory setting r0034 CO Thermal motor load r0068 0 1 CO Absolute actual current value Arms p0344 M Motor weight for thermal motor model 0 kg p0604 M Mot_temp_mod 2 KTY alarm threshold 130 C p0605 M Mot_temp_mod 1 2 sensor threshold and tempera...

Page 310: ... Motor stall current 0 Arms p0610 M Motor overtemperature response 12 p0611 M I2t thermal motor model time constant 0 s p0612 M Mot_temp_mod activation 0000 0010 0000 0010 bin p0613 M Mot_temp_mod 1 3 ambient temperature 20 C p0625 M Motor ambient temperature during commissioning 20 C p0627 M Motor overtemperature stator winding 80 K r0632 M Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature C p5390 M Mot_te...

Page 311: ...or The converter therefore monitors its DC link voltage and when necessary switches off the connected motor and outputs the fault DC link overvoltage Function description Protecting the motor and converter against overvoltage 9GFBPD FRQWUROOHU DFWLYH PRWRULQJ PRWRULQJ JHQHUDWLQJ 6SHHG OLQN YROWDJH U 6ZLWFK LQ OHYHO 9GFBPD FRQWUROOHU 9GFBPD U W W W Q Q Q Figure 6 72 Simplified representation of the...

Page 312: ...ler switch on level V p1243 D Vdc_max controller dynamic factor 100 p1250 D Vdc controller proportional gain 1 p1251 D Vdc controller integral time 0 ms p1252 D Vdc controller derivative action time 0 ms p1254 Vdc_max controller ON level for automatic detection 0 Further information is provided in the parameter list 6 7 6 Monitoring the driven load In many applications the speed and the torque of ...

Page 313: ... each speed for pumps and fans Insufficient torque indicates that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected An excessive torque can indicate problems in the mechanical system of the driven load e g a mechanically blocked load Blocking protection leakage protection and dry running protection are a monitor ing method for pumps or fans The monitoring combines a torque monitoring wit...

Page 314: ...tion 5 r1746 Motor model fault signal stall detection p2178 D Motor stalled delay time 0 01 s r2198 CO BO Status word monitoring functions 2 6 7 6 2 No load monitoring Function description An inadequate motor current indicates an interruption in the power transmission from the motor to the load If the motor current for the time p2180 lies below the current level p2179 the converter signals output ...

Page 315: ...ime p2177 while the motor current reaches the current limit the converter signals Motor blocked and fault F07900 Parameters Number Name Factory settings p0045 Display values of smoothing time constant 4 ms r0063 CO Speed actual value rpm p2175 D Motor blocked speed threshold 120 rpm p2177 D Motor blocked delay time 3 s r2198 Status word monitoring functions 2 Advanced commissioning 6 7 Drive prote...

Page 316: ...onger than time p2192 the converter reacts as specified in p2181 The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p2181 D Load monitoring response 0 p2182 D Load monitoring speed threshold 1 150 rpm p2183 D Load monitoring speed threshold 2 900 rpm p2184 D Load monitoring speed threshold 3 1500 rpm p2185 D Load monitoring torqu...

Page 317: ...UTXH 1P U UXQQLQJ SURWHFWLRQ RU EURNHQ EHOW U UXQQLQJ SURWHFWLRQ RU EURNHQ EHOW HDNDJH SXPSV HDNDJH SXPSV ORFNHG ORFNHG If the torque and speed lie in the impermissible range longer than time p2192 the converter reacts as specified in p2181 For applications with pumps p2193 4 the converter detects the following states of the driven load Blocked Leakage Dry running For applications with fans or com...

Page 318: ... threshold 1 150 rpm p2183 D Load monitoring speed threshold 2 900 rpm p2184 D Load monitoring speed threshold 3 1500 rpm p2186 D Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower 0 Nm p2188 D Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower 0 Nm p2190 D Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower 0 Nm p2191 D Load monitoring torque threshold no load 0 Nm p2192 D Load monitoring delay time 10 s p2193 D Load monitorin...

Page 319: ...ring motor operation If the encoder signal fails for time p2192 the converter signals fault F07936 S 7 U S W W 9 S Figure 6 73 Function plan and time response of the speed monitoring Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0722 CO BO CU digital inputs status p2192 D Load monitoring delay time 10 s p2193 D Load monitoring configuration 1 p3232 C BI Load monitoring failure detection 1 Further inform...

Page 320: ...ter impresses the search current in the motor and increases the output frequency 2 When the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed the converter waits for the motor excitation build up time 3 The converter accelerates the motor to the actual speed setpoint 21 2 6SHHG QYHUWHU RXWSXW IUHTXHQF 7KH LQYHUWHU PDJQHWL HV WKH PRWRU W W Figure 6 74 Principle of operation of the flying restart func...

Page 321: ...urrent short circuit current Arms p0346 M Motor excitation build up time 0 s p0347 M Motor de excitation time 0 s p1201 C BI Flying restart enable signal source 1 p1202 D Flying restart detection current 90 100 p1203 D Flying restart search rate factor 150 100 Advanced commissioning 6 8 Drive availability SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 319 ...

Page 322: ...phase Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in serious injury and material damage Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure or after a fault then you must also activate the flying restart function Flying restart switching on while the motor is running Page...

Page 323: ... to switch on the motor is available at a digital input or via the fieldbus ON OFF1 1 p1210 14 or 16 Never 2 The converter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions p1210 1 Never p1210 4 6 14 16 or 26 If the command to switch on the motor is available at a digital input or via the fieldbus ON OFF1 1 3 If after a flying restart and magnetization r0056 4 1 no fault...

Page 324: ... automatically starting when the fieldbus communication fails you must enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p1206 Automatic restart faults not active 0 p1210 Automatic restart mode 0 p1211 Automatic restart start attempts 3 p1212 Automatic restart wait time start attempts 1 s p1213 0 Automatic restart monitoring time for restart...

Page 325: ...in control intervenes at an adjustable threshold The VDC min control forces the load to go into slightly regenerative operation As a consequence the converter covers its power loss and the losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load The load speed decreases but the DC link voltage remains constant during the kinetic buffering After the line supply returns the converter immediately resu...

Page 326: ...onally high temperatures inside and outside the converter Open fire inside and outside the converter Emissions of light noise particles or gases Function description Activating and terminating essential service mode Signal p3880 1 activates the essential service mode If the motor was switched off by activating essential service mode the converter switches the motor on The speed setpoint is die ESM...

Page 327: ...ve essential service mode P3881 specifies the setpoint If you have defined an analog input as setpoint source using p3881 the converter can switch over to setpoint p3882 in case of wire breakage Interaction for bypass and essential service mode If when activating the essential service mode bypass operation is active converter operation is selected internally in order to ensure that the setpoint is...

Page 328: ...ation in the stairwells the ventilation control creates an underpressure in the building With this control a fire would mean that flue gases enter into the stairwell This would then mean that the stairs would be blocked as escape or evacuation route Using the essential service mode function the ventilation switches over to the control of an overpressure The essential service mode prevents the prop...

Page 329: ... 0 p3881 ESM setpoint source 0 p3882 ESM alternative setpoint source 0 p3883 BI ESM direction of rotation signal source 0 p3884 CI ESM technology controller setpoint 0 r3889 0 10 CO BO ESM status word Advanced commissioning 6 8 Drive availability SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 327 ...

Page 330: ...6SHHG VHWSRLQW LQ WHQGHG 6HUYLFH 0RGH 60 URW GLU V V 60 DFW V V FDXVHG E ZLUH EUHDNDJH LQ DVW NQRZQ VHWSRLQW 60 VHWSBVUF 3 UHFY ZRUG 8 YDOXH LQ 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 60 VHWSBVUF DOW 7RWDO VHWSRLQW HII USP FDXVHG E ZLUH EUHDNDJH LQ VLJQDO VRXUFH RI S VVHQWLDO 6HUYLFH 0RGH 60 7HFKQRORJ IXQFWLRQV y U U U S S S S S S S ุ U U U U U U S S KH S S U U U U U S U Figure 6 78 Essential service mode Advanced commis...

Page 331: ... the dynamic performance Even when efficiency optimization is active the converter closed loop motor control prevents the motor from stalling Precondition Efficiency optimization functions under the following preconditions Operation with an induction motor Vector control is set in the converter Function description ULYHQ PDFKLQH QYHUWHU 6SHHG 6SHHG VSHFLILHG 9DULDEOH OX 7RUTXH Figure 6 79 Efficien...

Page 332: ...the optimum flux from the motor thermal model Based on its thermal motor model the converter continually determines for the actual operating point of the motor the interdependency between efficiency and flux The converter then sets the flux to achieve the optimum efficiency OX IILFLHQF OX IILFLHQF IILFLHQF RSWLPL DWLRQ LV QRW DFWLYH IILFLHQF RSWLPL DWLRQ LV DFWLYH Figure 6 81 Qualitative result of...

Page 333: ...ge results in higher efficiency Parameters The converter calculates the parameters for the thermal motor model based on the motor data that has been set and the motor data identification Table 6 73 Efficiency optimization method 2 Number Name Factory setting p1401 D Flux control configuration 0000 0000 0000 0110 bin p1570 D CO Flux setpoint 100 p3315 D Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit ...

Page 334: ...d for switching under load K2 is designed for switching an inductive load K1 and K2 are interlocked against closing at the same time Requirements The Bypass function is supported only for induction motors The Flying restart function must be activated for the Bypass function p1200 1 or 4 Flying restart switching on while the motor is running Page 318 Advanced commissioning 6 9 Energy saving SINAMIC...

Page 335: ...urrent 10 rated motor current can flow temporarily The current depends on the random phase shift between the converter voltage and the line voltage Switching from line operation to converter operation 1 The converter opens the K2 line contactor via a digital output 2 The converter waits for the unlocking time of the motor 3 The converter waits for the feedback that the K2 line contactor is open 4 ...

Page 336: ...ting via a control signal p1267 0 1 The converter switches the motor between converter operation and line operation depending on the bypass control command p1266 Changeover depending on the speed U VLJQDO IRU LQH RSHUDWLRQ S IHHGEDFN VLJQDO RI QYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ S IHHGEDFN VLJQDO RI LQH RSHUDWLRQ U VLJQDO IRU QYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 0RWRU UDWHG VSHHG S E SDVV WKUHVKROG U VHWSRLQW 5 SDVV VSHHG WKUHVKROG U...

Page 337: ...ter switches the motor to line operation If the speed setpoint falls below the bypass speed threshold the converter switches the motor to converter operation Advanced commissioning 6 9 Energy saving SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 335 ...

Page 338: ...LD D FRQWURO VLJQDO S LQH RSHUDWLRQ 0RQLWRULQJ WLPH IRU 6ZLWFK WBPRQLW RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 0RQLWRULQJ WLPH IRU LQH RSHUDWLRQ HHGEDFN IURP RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ HHGEDFN IURP LQH RSHUDWLRQ 6LJQDO IRU FRQWDFWRU RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 6LJQDO IRU FRQWDFWRU FWXDO VSHHG IURP FRQYHUWHU 0RWRU UDWHG VSHHG O LQJ UHVWDUW 3RZHU XS RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 6ZLWFKRYHU SKDVH 6ZLWFKRYHU SKDVH LQH RSHUDWLRQ 6Z...

Page 339: ...vated Essential service mode function influences the Bypass function Essential service mode Page 324 Converter control For operation of the motor on the line supply the onverter no longer responds to the OFF1 command but rather only to OFF2 and OFF3 Temperature monitoring for the motor The converter evaluates the temperature sensor in the motor also for line operation of the motor Motor protection...

Page 340: ... speed setpoint you have to monitor the setpoint amount To do this set p1110 0 When the setpoint is input from the technology controller the converter monitors the technology controller deviation r2273 and switches on the motor again if the deviation of the technology controller exceeds the hibernation mode restart value p2392 In the factory setting the converter monitors the positive deviation of...

Page 341: ...rnal technology controller With this operating mode you have to set the technology controller as the setpoint source p2200 and use the output of the technology controller as the main setpoint p2251 The boost can be deactivated 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU DV PDLQ VHWSRLQW LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH RIIVHW 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU GHYLDWLRQ U 5HVWDUW VSHHG RRVW VSHHG S 6WDUW VSH...

Page 342: ...LPXP VSHHG S Speed Pressure S S S S S S S W W S S W W Figure 6 89 Hibernation mode using an external setpoint with boost W S S ෪ S W UHVWDUW VSHHG S ෪ S 5HVWDUW VSHHG 6WDUW VSHHG 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ FWXDO YDOXH 6HWSRLQW 6HWSRLQW LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH RIIVHW 5HVWDUW RIIVHW 5HVWDUW VSHHG 6WDUW VSHHG LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH DFWLYH 0LQLPXP VSHHG S Speed Pressure S S S S S S S W W S S W W Figure 6 90 H...

Page 343: ...xpires The hibernation mode start speed is calculated as follows Start speed p1080 p2390 p1080 minimum speed p2390 hibernation mode start speed p2391 Hibernation mode delay time 0 3599 s factory setting 120 The hibernation mode delay time starts as soon as the output frequency of the converter drops below the hibernation mode start speed p2390 If the output frequency increases above this threshold...

Page 344: ...accelerated for the time set in p2394 along the acceleration ramp but not to more than the speed set in p2395 Caution The boost may not result in any overpressure or overrun p2396 Maximum hibernation mode shutdown time 0 factory setting to 863 999 s At the latest when this time expires the converter switches to normal operation and ac celerates up to the start speed p1080 p2390 If the con verter i...

Page 345: ...398 0 01 Hibernation mode active 02 Hibernation mode delay time active 03 Hibernation mode boost active 04 Hibernation mode motor switched off 05 Hibernation mode motor switched off cyclic restart active 06 Energy saving mode motor restarts 07 Hibernation mode supplies the total setpoint of the ramp function generator 08 Hibernation mode bypasses the ramp function generator in the setpoint channel...

Page 346: ...priately varying the speed of the fluid flow machine By controlling the flow rate the fluid flow machine operates at the optimum efficiency for each flow rate This situation means that in the partial load range less electric power is required than when controlling the flow rate using valves and throttles LQH VXSSO QYHUWHU LQH VXSSO QYHUWHU Figure 6 92 Flow control with pump and converter Function ...

Page 347: ...nergy display p0040 Reset energy consumption display 0 r0041 Energy saved r0042 0 n CO Process energy display p0043 BI Energy consumption display enabled 0 p3320 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 1 25 p3321 0 n Fluid flow machine speed point 1 0 p3322 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 2 50 p3323 0 n Fluid flow machine speed point 2 25 p3324 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 3 77 p3325 0 n Fluid...

Page 348: ... ms If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets i e same motor number in p0826 then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation The associated parameters are indexed index 0 1 2 or 3 One of the four indexes is selected with control commands and thereby one of the four saved settings The settings in the converter with the same index are called a drive d...

Page 349: ... data set p0819 2 1 Starts the copy operation Parameters Number Name Factory setting p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1 r0051 CO BO Drive data set DDS effective p0180 Drive data set DDS number 1 p0819 0 2 Copy drive data set DDS 0 p0820 C BI Drive data set DDS selection bit 0 0 p0821 C BI Drive data set DDS selection bit 1 0 p0826 M Motor changeover motor number 0 Advanced commissioning ...

Page 350: ...Advanced commissioning 6 10 Switchover between different settings SINAMICS G120XA converter 348 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 351: ...indices depends on the data sets then the parameter index is shown in an abbreviated form 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI PRWRU GDWD VHWV 0 6 3DUDPHWHUV ZLWK LQGLFHV 3DUDPHWHUV ZLWK ELWV 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI GULYH GDWD VHWV 6 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI FRPPDQG GDWD VHWV 6 1XPEHU 1DPH DFWRU VHWWLQJ S S S 0 S S Figure 7 1 Brief parameter description SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructio...

Page 352: ...G 7KH SDUDPHWHU LV OLVWHG LQ D IXQFWLRQ GLDJUDP ZLWK WKH VSHFLILHG QXPEHU 7KH QXPEHU RI GDWD VHWV H J 6 GHILQHV WKH QXPEHU RI LQGLFHV 8 30 S Figure 7 2 Parameter description Function description Parameter number The parameter number is made up of a p or r followed by a number and optionally the index or bit array p1234 Adjustable parameters read and write r1234 Display parameters read only p1234 0...

Page 353: ...eger8 I8 8 bit integer Integer16 I16 16 bit integer Integer32 I32 32 bit integer Unsigned8 U8 8 bit without sign Unsigned16 U16 16 bit without sign Unsigned32 U32 32 bit without sign FloatingPoint32 Float 32 bit floating point number Scaling Specification of the reference variable with which a signal value is automatically converted with a BICO interconnection The following reference variables are...

Page 354: ... Switching on inhibited carry out first commissioning p0010 41 Switching on inhibited set ON OFF1 0 p0840 42 Switching on inhibited set OC OFF2 1 p0844 p0845 43 Switching on inhibited set OC OFF3 1 p0848 p0849 44 Switching on inhibited supply STO terminal w 24 V hardware 45 Switching on inhibited remove fault acknowledge fault 46 Switching on inhibited exit commissioning mode p0010 70 Initializati...

Page 355: ...meter is reset to a value of 0 short term communication interruptions may occur Note The drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning inverter enable To realize this this parameter must be set to 0 By setting p3900 to a value other than 0 the quick commissioning is completed and this parameter is automatically reset to 0 Procedure for Reset parameter Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1...

Page 356: ... rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U f characteristic after the interpolator Dependency See also r0060 Note Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The speed setpoint is available smoothed r0020 and unsmoothed r0060 r002...

Page 357: ...utput frequency Frequency components from the slip compensation for induction motors are included Dependency See also r0066 Note Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The output frequency is available smoothed r0024 and unsmoothed r0066 r0025 CO Output voltage smoothed Output voltage Access level 2 Calculated Data...

Page 358: ... diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations In this case the unsmoothed value should be used Note Smoothing time constant 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The absolute current actual value is available smoothed r0027 and unsmoothed r0068 r0031 Actual torque smoothed Actual torque Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoin...

Page 359: ...n 4 7 SP6 or p0612 12 0 the following applies the temperature model operates with an ambient temperature of 20 C A motor utilization of 100 is displayed r0034 100 when the following conditions are permanently fulfilled the ambient temperature is 40 C model 1 p0625 40 C model 3 p0613 40 C From firmware version 4 7 SP6 and p0612 12 1 the following applies the ambient temperature can be adapted to th...

Page 360: ... using the I2t calculation A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit It represents the current that can be conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses e g the continuously permissible current of the capacitors inductances busbars etc If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded then an overload 0 is not displayed I...

Page 361: ...maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter depletion layer or rectifier In the case of a fault the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit and cannot be read out r0039 0 2 CO Energy display Energy display Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min kWh Max kWh Factory setting k...

Page 362: ...stic is entered into p3320 p3329 For an operating time of below 100 hours the display is interpolated up to 100 hours r0042 0 2 CO Process energy display Proc energy disp Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Wh Max Wh Factory setting Wh Description Display and connector output for the energy values at the ...

Page 363: ...group Unit selection Function diagram 2634 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for missing enable signals that are preventing the closed loop drive control from being commissioned Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No 7954 01 OFF2 enable missing Yes No 02 OFF3 enable missing Yes No 03 Operation enable missing Yes No 04 DC braking enabl...

Page 364: ...is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the switching on inhibited withdrawn with OFF1 0 Bit 17 1 enable signal missing if commissioning mode is selected p0010 0 there is an OFF2 fault response the drive is not operational Bit 18 1 enable signal missing if OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present Bit 19 1 internal pulse enable missing if seque...

Page 365: ...ionary measurement selected r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization MotID and n_opt CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 1 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 300 Factory setting Description Displays the actual status for the motor data identification stationary measurement and the speed contr...

Page 366: ...gnal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DDS effective bit 0 ON OFF 01 DDS effective bit 1 ON OFF Dependency See also p0820 p0821 r0837 Note When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement the drive data set changeover is suppressed r0052 0 15 CO BO Status word 1 ZSW 1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit sel...

Page 367: ...it 3 Bit 15 r2135 Bit 15 negated r0053 1 11 CO BO Status word 2 ZSW 2 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for status word 2 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 01 n_act p1226 n_standstill Yes No 02 n_act p1080 n_min Yes No 03 I_act p2170 ...

Page 368: ...standstill Yes No 02 n_act p1080 n_min Yes No 03 I_act p2170 Yes No 04 n_act p2155 Yes No 05 n_act p2155 Yes No 06 n_act r1119 n_set Yes No 07 Vdc p2172 Yes No 08 Vdc p2172 Yes No 09 Ramp up ramp down completed Yes No 10 Technology controller output at the lower limit Yes No 11 Technology controller output at the upper limit Yes No NOTICE p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdriv...

Page 369: ...meter lower Yes No 15 CDS bit 0 Yes No Note The following control bits are displayed in r0054 Bit 00 r0898 Bit 0 Bit 01 r0898 Bit 1 Bit 02 r0898 Bit 2 Bit 03 r0898 Bit 3 Bit 04 r0898 Bit 4 Bit 05 r0898 Bit 5 Bit 06 r0898 Bit 6 Bit 07 r2138 Bit 7 Bit 08 r0898 Bit 8 Bit 09 r0898 Bit 9 Bit 10 r0898 Bit 10 Bit 11 r1198 Bit 11 Bit 13 r1198 Bit 13 Bit 14 r1198 Bit 14 Bit 15 r0836 Bit 0 r0055 0 15 CO BO ...

Page 370: ...STW CUG120XA_USS DC braking Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2513 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for supplementary control word Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No 01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No 02 Fixed setpoint bit 2 Yes No 03 Fixed ...

Page 371: ...arting Active Inactive 6301 06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301 07 Frequency negative Yes No 08 Field weakening active Yes No 09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714 10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310 11 Frequency limit active Yes No 12 Current limiting controller voltage output active Yes No 13 Current torque limiting Active Inactive 6060 14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220 6320 15 Vdc_mi...

Page 372: ...3 0 smoothed with p0045 is additionally displayed in r0063 1 r0063 1 can be used as process variable for the appropriate smoothing time constant p0045 The speed r0063 2 calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual value r0063 0 in the steady state For U f control the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063 2 e...

Page 373: ...ription Display and connector output for the maximum output current of the power unit Dependency The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal protection See also p0290 p0640 r0068 0 1 CO Absolute current actual value I_act abs val Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit gr...

Page 374: ...rms Max Vrms Factory setting Vrms Description Displays the maximum output voltage Dependency The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage r0070 and the maximum modulation depth p1803 Note As the driven motor load increases the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage r0072 CO Output voltage U_output Access level 3 Calculated Data type Floatin...

Page 375: ...Arms Description Display and connector output for the torque generating current setpoint Note This value is irrelevant for the U f control mode r0078 CO Current actual value torque generating Iq_act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group 6_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6310 6700 6714 6799 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting...

Page 376: ...p0045 2 Electric power Dependency See also r0032 Note The mechanical active power is available smoothed r0032 with 100 ms r0082 1 with p0045 and unsmoothed r0082 0 r0087 CO Actual power factor Cos phi act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual active ...

Page 377: ... for the first time and for the factory setting depending on the power unit that is connected Depending on the setting the ability to see control parameters is restricted depending on the particular application The following applies for p0096 0 The motor data identification routine is preset p1900 2 Note When changing p0096 to 1 or 2 when completing commissioning fast parameterization should be ex...

Page 378: ...iption Configuration of the motor when commissioning the motor Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Motor connection type Delta Star 01 Motor 87 Hz operation Yes No Dependency For standard induction motors p0301 10000 bit 0 is automatically pre assigned the connection type of the selected data set For p0100 0 60 Hz rated motor frequency it is not possible to select bit 1 See also p030...

Page 379: ...signed16 Can be changed C2 2 Scaling Dynamic index PDS p0120 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used When commissioned for the first time the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201 Note The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being com...

Page 380: ...0 SINAMICS SL 400 SINAMICS DCM Note For parallel circuit configurations the parameter index is assigned to a power unit r0204 0 n Power unit hardware properties PU HW property Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index PDS p0120 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the properties supported by the power unit...

Page 381: ...alculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 2 Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before and after the overload This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s Value 0 Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives...

Page 382: ...ted Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8021 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting Arms Description Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles Index 0 Rated value 1 Load duty cycle with low overload 2 Load duty cycle with high overload 3 S1 cont duty cyc 4 S6 load duty cycle Dependency See also p0205 Note Wide ...

Page 383: ...n levels 0 The switch in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller r1242 r1282 are then directly determined using p0210 NOTICE If in the switched off state pulse inhibit the supply voltage is higher than the entered value the Vdc controller may be automatically deactivated in some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating the next time the system is switched on In this case an appropriate alarm A074...

Page 384: ... e g PM260 is equipped with an internal sine wave filter For sine wave filters the test pulse evaluation to detect short circuits is always deactivated Only motor reactor filter type can be selected for a synchronous reluctance motor RESM If a filter type cannot be selected then this filter type is not permitted for the power unit p0230 1 Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequ...

Page 385: ... entered outside the commissioning phase p0010 0 and then the controller calculation p0340 3 is carried out The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit e g PM260 is equipped with an internal sine wave filter p0234 Power unit sine wave filter capacitance PU sine filter C Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection...

Page 386: ...caling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0010 0000 bin Description Sets the configuration for the output voltage measurement of the power unit Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Activate voltage measurement Yes No 01 Siemens internal Yes No 02 Siemens internal Yes No 05 Use voltage measured values for flying restart Yes No 07 ...

Page 387: ...ex Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Factory setting 0 6 0 1 16 0 Description Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum current of the power unit r0209 Index 0 Threshold at which precharging starts 1 Threshold at which precharging stops Dependency See also p1901 See also F30021 Note This parameter is o...

Page 388: ...e of the setting of this parameter Note The setting p0290 0 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed e g for applications with variable torque such as for pumps and fans Under overload conditions the current and torque limit are reduced and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden speed ranges e g minimum speed p1080 and suppression skip speeds p1091 p1094 can be passed t...

Page 389: ...y setting V Description Threshold to detect a DC link undervoltage If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage condition Dependency See also F30003 r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold Vdc U_upper_thresh Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram ...

Page 390: ...7 and p0311 For p0096 1 Standard Drive Control synchronous motor types cannot be selected CAUTION If a motor is selected which is not contained in the motor lists p0300 100 then the motor code number must be reset p0301 0 if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list NOTICE If a catalog motor is selected p0300 100 and an associated motor code number p0301 then the parameters that are...

Page 391: ... the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0 When selecting p0300 10 19 parameters p0335 p0626 p0627 and p0628 of the thermal motor model are pre assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311 CAUTION If a motor is selected which is not contained in the motor lists p0300 100 then the motor code number must be reset p0301 0 if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list NOTICE If a catalog m...

Page 392: ...ng a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor star delta must be taken into account Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored the parameter is...

Page 393: ...tive that the control parameters are adapted e g using automatic calculation with p0340 1 p3900 0 For induction motors that are connected in parallel but which are not mechanically coupled with one another then the following applies an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point NOTICE If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning p0010 1 then the maximum current p0640 is appropria...

Page 394: ... rated motor efficiency rating plate For a parameter value of 0 0 the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332 Dependency This parameter is only visible for NEMA motors p0100 1 2 See also p0100 p0308 r0332 Note The parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0310 0 n Rated motor frequency Mot f_rated Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 3 Sc...

Page 395: ...ngs have been defined accordingly the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit p0311 0 n Rated motor speed Mot n_rated Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 3 Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 rpm Max 210000 0 rpm Factory setting 0 0 rpm Description Sets the rated motor speed rating plate For p0311 0 t...

Page 396: ...orque constant of the synchronous motor p0316 0 The torque constant is calculated from the motor data p0316 0 The selected value is used as torque constant NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note This parameter is not used for induction motor...

Page 397: ...ex MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Arms Max 20000 00 Arms Factory setting 0 00 Arms Description Sets the maximum permissible motor current e g de magnetizing current for synchronous motors NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write...

Page 398: ...0 then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected p0300 p0329 0 n Motor pole position identification current Mot PolID current Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0000 Arms Max 10000 0000 Arms Factory setting 0 0000 Arms Description Sets the current for the pole ...

Page 399: ...ram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the rated power factor for induction motors For IEC motors the following applies p0100 0 For p0308 0 the internally calculated power factor is displayed For p0308 0 this value is displayed For NEMA motors the following applies p0100 1 2 For p0309 0 the internally calculated power factor is displayed For p0309 0 this value is converted into the power...

Page 400: ...eter influences the thermal 3 mass motor model 1LA7 motors frame size 56 are operated without fan p0340 0 n Automatic calculation motor control parameters Calc auto par Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Description Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters...

Page 401: ... p0360 p0340 3 contains the calculations of p0340 4 5 p0340 4 only calculates the controller parameters p0340 5 only calculates the controller limits When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 0 p0340 is automatically set to 1 At the end of the calculations p0340 is automatically set to 0 p0341 0 n Motor moment of inertia Mot M_mom of inert Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Floa...

Page 402: ...y IEC drives p0100 0 unit kg NEMA drives p0100 1 unit lb NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor The parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0300 2xx r0345 0 n Nom...

Page 403: ...ry setting 0 000 s Description Sets the de magnetizing time for induction motors after the inverter pulses have been canceled The inverter pulses cannot be switched in enabled within this delay time Note The parameter is calculated using p0340 1 3 For induction motors the result depends on the rotor time constant r0384 if this time is shortened too much then this can result in an inadequate de mag...

Page 404: ...cable between the power unit and motor CAUTION The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification If it is used subsequently the difference by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be repeated The difference with which p0352 was manually changed must also be subtracted from reference parameter p0629 of t...

Page 405: ...et synchronous motors p0300 2 this is the non saturated value and is therefore ideal for a low current For a controlled reluctance motor p0300 6 this is the direct axis stator inductance at the rated operating point p0357 0 n Motor stator inductance d axis Mot L_stator d Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_EQU Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group U...

Page 406: ...refully observed when removing write protection Note The parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0300 2 r0384 0 n Motor rotor time constant damping time constant d axis Mot T_rotor T_Dd Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6722 6837 Min ms Max ms Factory setting ms Description Displays th...

Page 407: ...by the motor temperature model Dependency See also p0354 Note In each case only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the thermal motor model This parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0300 2xx p0500 Technology application Tec application Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index Unit grou...

Page 408: ...on is activated p3855 7 For p1750 The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors p1750 2 1 Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency This operating mode is possible for passive loads These include applications where the load does not generate regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill zero speed itself when the pulses...

Page 409: ...ation The parameter influences the calculation of open loop and closed loop control parameters that is e g initiated using p0340 5 Value 0 Constant load linear characteristic 1 Speed dependent load parabolic characteristic Dependency See also p1300 NOTICE If the technological application is set to p0501 0 1 during commissioning p0010 1 5 30 the operating mode p1300 is pre set accordingly Note The ...

Page 410: ...signed depending on p0205 power unit application p0502 Technological application Dynamic Drive Control Techn appl DDC CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 3 Max 3 Factory setting 3 Description Sets the technology application for dynamic applications p0096 2 The parameter influence...

Page 411: ...0000 Factory setting 1 000000 Description Sets the reference values for the specific scaling of BICO parameters The specific scaling is active when interconnecting with other BICO parameters and can be used in the following cases 1 Parameter with the marking Scaling p0514 2 Changing the standard scaling for parameters with the marking Scaling p2000 Scaling p2007 Relative values refer to the corres...

Page 412: ...1 for the specific scaling p0516 0 parameter number p0516 1 parameter number p0516 2 parameter number p0516 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0517 0 19 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 2 Scal spec p514 2 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory...

Page 413: ...level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514 5 for the specific scaling p0520 0 parameter number p0520 1 parameter number p0520 2 parameter number p0520 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0521 0 19...

Page 414: ...alue in p0514 8 for the specific scaling p0523 0 parameter number p0523 1 parameter number p0523 2 parameter number p0523 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0524 0 19 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 9 Scal spec p514 9 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294...

Page 415: ... number of the bearing When setting p0301 and p0530 the code number is automatically pre assigned and is write protected The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection Dependency See also p0301 p0530 p0532 p1082 NOTICE If p0531 is changed during quick commissioning p0010 1 then the maximum speed p1082 which is also associated with quick commissioning is pre assigned app...

Page 416: ...Yes NOTICE The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters e g p0305 are entered and only one drive data set exists p0180 1 This is the case during initial commissioning Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated p0340 p3900 the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically re activated Note If value 0 The automatic calculation p...

Page 417: ...nology controller parameters are switched over unit group 9_1 See also p0596 Note When switching over from into another unit the following sequence applies set p0596 set p0595 to the required unit p0596 Technological unit reference quantity Tech unit ref qty Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0...

Page 418: ...ched out p0620 0 Otherwise in controlled loop operation torque errors will occur that will mean that the motor will not be able to be stopped Note For p0601 1 Tripping resistance 1650 Ohm Wire breakage and short circuit monitoring p0604 0 n Mot_temp_mod 2 sensor alarm threshold Mod 2 sens A_thr Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 U...

Page 419: ...34 p0611 p0612 See also F07011 A07012 NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Motor temperature model 1 I2t The following applies for firmware version 4 7 SP6 or p0612 8 0 p0605 also defines the final temperature of the model for r0034 100 Therefo...

Page 420: ... the motor standstill current is not parameterized up until a temperature rise of 63 of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached Dependency The parameter is only used for synchronous motors p0300 2xx 4 and synchronous reluctance motors p0300 6xx See also r0034 p0612 p0615 See also F07011 A07012 A07910 NOTICE This parameter is automatically pre set from the motor database f...

Page 421: ...ature model 1 operates in the standard mode Overtemperature at rated load p0605 40 C Alarm threshold p0605 Fault threshold p0615 The following applies from firmware version 4 7 SP6 bits 0 and 8 temperature model 1 operates in the extended mode Overtemperature at rated load p0627 Alarm threshold p5390 Fault threshold p5391 For bit 09 This bit is used to extend the motor temperature model 2 For firm...

Page 422: ... n Mot_temp_mod 1 I2t fault threshold I2t F thresh Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group 21_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8017 Min 0 0 C Max 220 0 C Factory setting 180 0 C Description Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 I2t The following applies for firmwar...

Page 423: ...f the induction motor can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor KTY PT1000 to a certain extent as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding whereas the measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding Furthermore this is a short time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase of the i...

Page 424: ...est point of the stator winding whereas the measured value of identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding The accuracy depends very heavily on how precisely the motor feeder cable resistance is known see p0352 The accuracy of the measurement can be improved by entering the feeder cable resistance p0352 and by determining the reference stator resistance p0629 for the ambient temper...

Page 425: ...ation if a temperature sensor is not being used see p0601 p0627 0 n Motor overtemperature stator winding Mot T_over stator Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_EQU Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group 21_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8017 8018 Min 15 K Max 200 K Factory setting 80 K Description Defines the rated overtemperature of the stat...

Page 426: ... index MDS p0130 Unit group 21_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8017 8018 Min C Max C Factory setting C Description Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model Dependency See also F07011 A07012 A07910 p0640 0 n Current limit Current limit Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit g...

Page 427: ...pe Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 h Max 4294967295 h Factory setting 0 h Description Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled When the pulse enable is withdrawn the counter is held and the value saved Dependency See also p0651 S...

Page 428: ...diagram 2201 2221 2256 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual value at the digital inputs This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode p0795 x 1 to terminal mode p0795 x 0 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X133 5 High Low 01 DI 1 X133 6 High Low 02 DI 2 X133 7 High Low 03 DI 3 X1...

Page 429: ...1 X133 6 High Low 02 DI 2 X133 7 High Low 03 DI 3 X133 8 High Low 04 DI 4 X133 16 High Low 05 DI 5 X133 17 High Low 11 DI 11 X131 3 4 AI 0 High Low 12 DI 12 X131 10 11 AI 1 High Low Dependency See also r0722 Note AI Analog Input DI Digital Input p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time CU DI t_debounce Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit g...

Page 430: ...ng active r0053 1 n_act p2167 n_off r0053 2 n_act p1080 n_min r0053 3 I_act p2170 r0053 4 n_act p2155 r0053 5 n_act p2155 r0053 6 n_act n_set r0053 10 Technology controller output at the lower limit r0053 11 Technology controller output at the upper limit NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note DO Digital Output Relay output NO normally open N...

Page 431: ...logy controller output at the lower limit r0053 11 Technology controller output at the upper limit NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note DO Digital Output Relay output NO normally open NC normally closed p0732 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 2 CU S_src DO 2 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling ...

Page 432: ... signal source for terminal DO 3 CU S_src DO 3 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 52 7 Description Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 NO X134 51 r0747 CU digital outputs status CU DO status Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic...

Page 433: ...me 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Analog input AI0 wire breakage Yes No 01 Analog input AI1 wire breakage Yes No 02 Analog input AI2 wire breakage Yes No 03 Analog input AI3 wire breakage Yes No 08 Analog input AI0 no wire breakage Yes No 09 Analog input AI1 no wire breakage Yes No 10 Analog input AI2 no wire breakage Yes No 11 Analog input AI3 no wire breakage Yes No Note AI Analog Input r0752 0 3 CO CU...

Page 434: ...nputs actual value in percent CU AI value in Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9566 9568 9576 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs When interconnected the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x Index 0 AI...

Page 435: ...nging p0756 the parameters of the scaling characteristic p0757 p0758 p0759 p0760 are overwritten with the following default values For p0756 0 4 p0757 is set to 0 0 V p0758 0 0 p0759 10 0 V and p0760 100 0 For p0756 1 p0757 is set to 2 0 V p0758 0 0 p0759 10 0 V and p0760 100 0 For p0756 2 p0757 is set to 0 0 mA p0758 0 0 p0759 20 0 mA and p0760 100 0 For p0756 3 p0757 is set to 4 0 mA p0758 0 0 p...

Page 436: ...n 50 000 Max 160 000 Factory setting 0 10 000 1 10 000 2 20 000 3 100 000 Description Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points This parameter specifies the x coordinate V mA C of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic Index 0 AI0 X131 3 4 1 AI1 X131 10 11 2 Reserved 3 Reserved Note The parameters for the char...

Page 437: ...polar current input monitored 4 mA 20 mA unit mA p0756 3 Wire breakage monitoring is not supported for this analog input See also p0756 Note AI Analog Input When p0761 0 wire breakage monitoring is not carried out p0762 0 3 CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time CU wire brk t_del Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit s...

Page 438: ... analog outputs Index 0 AO0 X132 12 13 1 AO1 X131 26 X132 27 2 Reserved Note AO Analog Output r0772 0 2 CU analog outputs output value currently referred CU AO outp act ref Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9572 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual referred output value of the analo...

Page 439: ...ction Function diagram 9572 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs Value 0 No absolute value generation 1 Absolute value generation switched in Index 0 AO0 X132 12 13 1 AO1 X131 26 X132 27 2 Reserved Note AO Analog Output p0776 0 2 CU analog outputs type CU AO type Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Sca...

Page 440: ... 27 2 Reserved Dependency See also p0776 NOTICE This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 type of analog outputs Note The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect p0778 0 2 CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 CU AO char y1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Functio...

Page 441: ...tion diagram 9572 Min 20 000 V Max 20 000 V Factory setting 20 000 V Description Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points This parameter specifies the y coordinate output voltage in V or output current in mA of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic Index 0 AO0 X132 12 13 1 AO1 X131 26 X132 27 2 Reserved De...

Page 442: ... 27 2 Reserved Dependency See also p0771 Note AO Analog Output The following interconnections must be established to control the analog outputs via fieldbus AO 0 p0771 0 with p0791 0 AO 1 p0771 1 with p0791 1 p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode CU DI simulation Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 220...

Page 443: ...inal eval 04 DI 4 X133 16 Simulation Terminal eval 05 DI 5 X133 17 Simulation Terminal eval 11 DI 11 X131 3 4 AI 0 Simulation Terminal eval 12 DI 12 X131 10 11 AI 1 Simulation Terminal eval Dependency The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795 See also p0795 Note This parameter is not saved when data is backed up p0971 AI Analog Input DI Digital Input p0797 0 3 CU analog inputs simu...

Page 444: ...m Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from to memory card Transfer from memory card to device memory p0804 1 sets the source of parameter backup e g p0802 48 PS048xxx ACX is the source Transfer from non volatile device memory to memory card p0804 2 sets the target of parameter backup e g p0802 23 PS023xxx ACX is the target Dependency ...

Page 445: ... be stored in the device memory as setting 10 p0802 22 parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22 p0803 10 define parameter backup with setting 10 as target in the device memory p0804 1 start data transfer from memory card to device memory PS022xxx ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS010xxx ACX this parameter backup can be loaded to the volati...

Page 446: ...master control PcCtrl inhibit Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to block the master control Dependency See also r0807 Note The commissioning software drive control panel uses the master control for example r0807 0 BO Master control activ...

Page 447: ...tion diagram 8560 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 CDS bit 0 Dependency See also r0050 p0811 r0836 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836 The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050 ...

Page 448: ...70 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8565 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set bit 0 DDS bit 0 Dependency See also r0051 p0826 r0837 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p0821 0 n BI Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 1 DDS select bit 1 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Bin...

Page 449: ... Armature short circuit active Yes No 05 Identification running Yes No 07 Rotating measurement running Yes No 08 Motor data identification running Yes No Note For bit 02 A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation For bit 04 A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated For bit 05 A data set changeover is...

Page 450: ...OFF OFF1 For the PROFIdrive profile this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 STW1 0 Recommendation When the setting for this binector input is changed the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source Dependency See also p1055 p1056 CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE For binector input p0840 0 si...

Page 451: ... 1 BI p0845 No coast down coast down OFF2 signal source 2 For the PROFIdrive profile the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 STW1 1 BI p0844 0 signal or BI p0845 0 signal OFF2 immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited BI p0844 1 signal and BI p0845 1 signal no OFF2 enable is possible CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input...

Page 452: ...9 0 n BI No Quick Stop Quick Stop OFF3 signal source 2 OFF3 S_src 2 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the second signal source for the command No quick stop quick stop OFF3 The following signals are AND ed BI p0848 No quick stop quick stop ...

Page 453: ...ion For the PROFIdrive profile this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 3 STW1 3 BI p0852 0 signal Inhibit operation suppress pulses BI p0852 1 signal Enable operation pulses can be enabled CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p0854 0 n BI Control by PLC no...

Page 454: ...xceeded Note The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power unit The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to precharge the DC link and if relevant the de bounce time of the contactors If an excessively low value is entered into p0857 then after enable this results in the corresponding fault p0860 BI Line contactor feedback signal Line contact feedb Access le...

Page 455: ... Closed loop control operation Yes No 01 Energize contactor Yes No 2634 Note For bit 01 Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor p0867 Power unit main contactor holding time after OFF1 PU t_MC after OFF1 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 ms Max 500 0 ms Factory setting 50 0 ms Des...

Page 456: ...er the main contactor holding time has elapsed For p0869 0 1 after withdrawing STO the switching on inhibited must be acknowledged via the source of p0840 0 OFF1 and before the main contactor holding time expires p0867 should go back to 1 otherwise the main contactor will open p0870 BI Close main contactor Close main cont Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scali...

Page 457: ... No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active 05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active 06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No 07 Drive ready Yes No 08 Controller enable Yes No 09 Control request Yes No 11 Pulses enabled Yes No Note For bits 00 01 02 04 05 06 09 For PROFIdrive these signals are used for status word 1 r0944 CO Counter for fault buffer changes Fault buff change Access level...

Page 458: ...case fault 8 r0946 0 65534 Fault code list Fault code list Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8060 Min Max Factory setting Description Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code Dependency The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r09...

Page 459: ... the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945 p0952 Fault cases counter Fault cases qty Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6700 8060 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset Dependency The fault buffer is del...

Page 460: ...read via PROFIdrive the TimeDifference data type applies p0970 Reset drive parameters Drive par reset Access level 1 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed C2 1 30 Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 300 Factory setting 0 Description The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters Parameters p0100 p0205 are not reset The following ...

Page 461: ...ptional is inserted and the USB interface is not used the following applies The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data NOTICE The Control Unit power supply may only be switched off after data has been saved i e after data save has been started wait until the parameter again has the value 0 Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving The progress while s...

Page 462: ...k the following p0972 0 the reset was successfully executed p0972 0 the reset was not executed p1000 0 n Speed setpoint selection n_set sel Access level 1 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 200 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the source for the speed setpoint For single digit values the following a...

Page 463: ...re influenced See also p1070 p1071 p1075 p1076 CAUTION If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus the following BICO interconnection is set automatically p2051 1 r0063 NOTICE The parameter is possibly protected as a result of p0922 For PROFIBUS PROFINET Control Units the following applies The parameter can be freely set by setting p0922 999 When executing a specific macro the corres...

Page 464: ...ata set always acts on the effective data set p1004 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 4 n_set_fixed 4 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 4 Depen...

Page 465: ...ata set always acts on the effective data set p1008 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 8 n_set_fixed 8 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 8 Depen...

Page 466: ...ata set always acts on the effective data set p1012 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 12 n_set_fixed 12 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 12 De...

Page 467: ...BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set p1016 Fixed speed setpoint select mode n_set_fix select Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3010 3011 Min 1 Max 2 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the mode to select the fixed speed setpoint Value 1 ...

Page 468: ...ccess level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2505 3010 3011 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint Dependency Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 p1023 Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197 Sets ...

Page 469: ... status n_setp_fix status Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and binector output for the status when selecting the fixed speed setpoints Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed speed setpoint selected Yes No 3011 Dependency See also p1016 Note For b...

Page 470: ... potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion for bit 00 1 For bit 04 When the bit is set the ramp function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050 p1035 0 n BI Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise Mop raise Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p...

Page 471: ...hase The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value see function diagram 3020 p1039 0 n BI Motorized potentiometer inversion MotP inv Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3020 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to invert the minimum s...

Page 472: ...ource for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode Dependency See also p1041 p1043 0 n BI Motorized potentiometer accept setting value MotP acc set val Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3020 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to accept t...

Page 473: ... selection Function diagram 3020 Min 0 000 s Max 1000 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the internal ramp function generator for the motorized potentiometer The setpoint is changed from the speed velocity limit p1082 to zero within this time if no initial rounding off has been activated Dependency See also p1030 p1047 p1082 Note The deceleration time is extende...

Page 474: ...culated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 3030 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for jog 1 Recommendation When the setting for this binector input is changed the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source Dependency See also p0840 p1058 NOT...

Page 475: ... Description Sets the speed for jog 2 Jogging JOG is level triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally traversed Dependency See also p1055 p1056 p1063 0 n Setpoint channel speed limit Setp_chan n_lim Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3040 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm...

Page 476: ...32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3001 3030 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint Dependency See also p1076 r1077 r1078 p1076 0 n CI Supplementary setpoint scaling Suppl setp scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling PERCENT Dyn...

Page 477: ...is not undershot in operation Dependency See also p1106 WARNING The minimum speed is preassigned to 20 of the rated motor speed After all of the enable signal have been switched on with the appropriate direction specified the motor accelerates to this minimum speed NOTICE The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106 Note The parameter value applies for both motor directions In except...

Page 478: ...miting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp up and ramp down times e g down ramps ramp function generator motor potentiometer The parameter is part of the quick commissioning p0010 1 this means that it is appropriately pre assigned when changing p0310 p0311 p0322 The following limits are always effective for p1082 p1082 60 x minimum 15 x p0310 550 Hz r0313 p1082 60 x maximum power uni...

Page 479: ... r1084 CO Speed limit positive effective n_limit pos eff Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 7958 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Display and connector output for the active positive speed limit Dependency See also p1082 p1083 p1085 Note Vector control r1084 60 x 240...

Page 480: ...91 0 n Skip speed 1 n_skip 1 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Sets skip speed 1 Dependency See also p1092 p1093 p1094 p1101 NOTICE Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the d...

Page 481: ... downstream limits in the setpoint channel p1098 0 n CI Skip speed scaling n_skip scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3050 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for scaling the skip speeds Dependency See also p1091 p1092 p1093 p1094 r1099 0 CO B...

Page 482: ... p1106 0 n CI Minimum speed signal source n_min s_src Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3050 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed Dependency See also p1080 NOTICE The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p...

Page 483: ...peed velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction r1119 CO Ramp function generator setpoint at the input RFG setp at inp Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 3070 6300 8022 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the setpoint at the input of the ...

Page 484: ...0 n Ramp function generator ramp down time RFG ramp down time Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 Min 0 000 s Max 999999 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the ramp function generator The ramp function generator ramps down the speed setpoint fr...

Page 485: ...nitial rounding off time for the extended ramp generator The value applies to ramp up and ramp down Note Rounding off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint p2251 0 p1130 0 n Ramp function generator initial rounding off time RFG t_start_round CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 2 ...

Page 486: ...r the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp function generator Value 0 Continuous smoothing 1 Discontinuous smoothing Dependency No effect up to initial rounding off time p1130 0 s Note p1134 0 continuous smoothing If the setpoint is reduced while ramping up initially a final rounding off is carried out and then the ramp up completed During the final rounding off the output of the ramp function g...

Page 487: ... level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 Min 0 000 s Max 30 000 s Factory setting 0 500 s Description Sets the initial rounding off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator p1137 0 n OFF3 final rounding off time RFG OFF3 t_end_del Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be c...

Page 488: ...unction generator the ramp function generator output is set to zero BI p1140 1 signal Enable ramp function generator Dependency See also r0054 p1141 p1142 CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p1141 0 n BI Continue ramp function generator freeze ramp function gene...

Page 489: ...e When the function module position control r0108 3 1 is activated this binector input is interconnected as follows as standard BI p1142 0 signal p1143 0 n BI Ramp function generator accept setting value RFG accept set v Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 Min Max Factory setting 2964...

Page 490: ...amp function generator acceleration RFG acceleration Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2007 Dynamic index Unit group 39_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3070 Min rev s Max rev s Factory setting rev s Description Displays the acceleration of the ramp function generator r1170 CO Speed controller setpoint sum Speed setpoint sum Access level 3 Calculate...

Page 491: ...tart vector control p1202 p1203 r1205 For synchronous motors flying restart cannot be activated See also p1201 See also F07330 F07331 NOTICE The flying restart function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running e g after a brief line supply interruption or is being driven by the load The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent Note For p1200 1 4 the following a...

Page 492: ...not very high for example The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor Adjusting the search current only has an effect if a motor data identification run is then performed see p1909 bit 22 It is possible that a value exceeding 100 cannot be reached if the motor rated power is significantly less than that of the power unit If the motor rated power is significantly higher than that of th...

Page 493: ...empts 6 Restart after fault with additional start attempts 14 Restart after line supply failure following man acknowledgment 16 Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment 26 Acknowledging all faults and reclosing for an ON command Recommendation For brief line supply failures the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting The flying restart function p1200 might need to be activated...

Page 494: ...nter always starts with the counter value that applied before the power failure and decrements this start attempt by 1 If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic restart function prior to power failure e g when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212 2 the fault counter will already have been decremented once In this case the start counter is thus dec...

Page 495: ...lay time If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in the delay time p1213 0 1 Automatic restart monitoring time AR t_monit Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 s Max 10000 0 s Factory setting 0 60 0 s 1 0 0 s Descr...

Page 496: ...itch on command issued within the time in p1213 0 Otherwise fault F07320 is generated after the set time p1226 0 n Threshold for zero speed detection n_standst n_thresh Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8022 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 20 00 rpm Description S...

Page 497: ...se suppression delay time Pulse suppr t_del Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8022 Min 0 000 s Max 299 000 s Factory setting 0 010 s Description Sets the delay time for pulse suppression After OFF1 or OFF3 the pulses are canceled if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled the speed a...

Page 498: ...gnetization Flying restart must be activated if the motor is still rotating DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible For p1231 14 In addition to the function for p1231 5 binector input p1230 is evaluated DC braking is only automatically activated when the speed threshold p1234 is fallen below if binector input p1230 1 signal This is also the case if no OFF command is present ...

Page 499: ... type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Status word of the DC braking Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 08 DC braking active Yes No 7017 10 DC braking ready Yes No 7017 11 DC braking selected Yes No 12 DC braking selection internally inhibited Yes No 13 DC braking for OFF1 OFF3 Yes No Dependen...

Page 500: ...42 is limited to Vdc_max 50 0 V If p1254 1 automatic sensing of the switch in level on then the following applies r1242 Vdc_max 50 0 V Vdc_max Overvoltage threshold of the power unit r1242 Vdc_max 25 0 V for 230 V power units NOTICE If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the deactivated state pulse inhibit by the DC link voltage then the controller can be automati...

Page 501: ...oatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6220 Min 1 Max 10000 Factory setting 300 Description Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller kinetic buffering 100 means that p1250 p1251 and p1252 gain integral time and rate time are used corresponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization If...

Page 502: ... changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6220 Min 0 ms Max 1000 ms Factory setting 0 ms Description Sets the rate time constant for the DC link voltage controller Vdc_min controller Vdc_max controller Dependency The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 Vdc_max controller dynamic factor p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level d...

Page 503: ...min controller kinetic buffering If this value is exceeded a fault is output the required response can be parameterized Kinetic buffering is not started below the speed threshold Note Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing significantly at low speeds and after a pulse inhibit means that the motor coasts down However th...

Page 504: ... switch motor line supply Close Open 05 Feedback signal switch motor power unit Closed Opened 06 Feedback signal switch motor line supply Closed Opened 07 Bypass command from p1266 Yes No 10 Bypass in process sequence Yes No 11 Bypass enabled Yes No Dependency The Bypass function is only available for induction motors Note Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via whi...

Page 505: ...y The Bypass function is only available for induction motors If the drive setpoint speed is entered via a motorized potentiometer then the configuration bit p1030 4 should be set in order to ensure the bypass via speed threshold function Note When selecting p1260 3 and p1267 1 1 the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached The bypass speed threshold is only effective for positi...

Page 506: ... interconnect the corresponding control bit as the signal source BI p1269 0 r1261 0 BI p1269 1 r1261 1 Entering p1269 0 sets this interconnection automatically for switches without a feedback signal p1271 0 n Flying restart maximum frequency for the inhibited direction FlyRes f_max dir Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group...

Page 507: ...ut voltages p0210 the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max controller set the input voltage as low as possible and in so doing avoid A07401 p0210 set the rounding times p1130 p1136 increase the ramp down times p1121 reduce the integral time of the controller p1291 factor 0 5 activate the Vdc correction in the current controller p1810 1 1 or reduce the derivative a...

Page 508: ...s activated Note The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage falls below the threshold 0 95 r1282 and the controller output is zero p1283 0 n Vdc_max controller dynamic factor U f Vdc_max dyn_factor CUG120XA_USS Vdc_max Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function...

Page 509: ..._factor Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6320 6854 Min 1 Max 10000 Factory setting 100 Description Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller kinetic buffering 100 means that p1290 p1291 and p1292 gain integral time and rate time are used corresponding to their basi...

Page 510: ... controller is determined from the parameterized connection voltage p0210 Value 0 Automatic detection inhibited 1 Automatic detection enabled p1295 0 n Vdc_min controller time threshold U f Vdc_min t_thresh Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 000 s Max 10000 000 s Factory setting 0 0...

Page 511: ... loop control operating mode Op cl lp ctrl_mode Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6300 6301 6851 8012 Min 0 Max 20 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the open and closed loop control mode of a drive Value 0 U f control with linear characteristic 1 U f control with linear characteristic and ...

Page 512: ...t the slip is completely compensated generally 100 The Eco mode is only effective in steady state operation and when the ramp function generator is not bypassed In the case of analog setpoints if required the tolerance for ramp up and ramp down should be actively increased for the ramp function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady state condition Note For motors type p0300 14...

Page 513: ...s reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor frequency the rated motor voltage is present The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows Voltage boost V 1 732 x p0305 rated motor current A x r0395 stator primary section resistance ohm x p1310 permanent voltage boost 100 At low output frequencies there is only a low output voltage in order to maint...

Page 514: ...311 voltage boost when accelerating 100 Dependency The current limit p0640 limits the boost For field orientation p1302 bit 4 1 not PM230 PM250 PM260 p1311 is pre assigned by the automatic calculation For vector control the starting current is realized using p1611 See also p1300 p1310 p1312 r1315 NOTICE The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase Note The voltage boost when ac...

Page 515: ... that the output voltage can be reduced with respect to the calculated maximum voltage r0071 and the start of field weakening Note The output voltage is only limited if as a result of p1331 the maximum output voltage r0071 is fallen below p1333 0 n U f control FCC starting frequency U f FCC f_start Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic ...

Page 516: ...t The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1335 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned e g p0300 p1335 0 n Slip compensation scaling Slip comp scal CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6300 6310 Min 0 0 Max 600...

Page 517: ...shutoff frequency is determined by p1349 For the open loop control modes p1300 5 and 6 textile sectors the resonance damping is internally disabled in order that the output frequency can be precisely set p1340 0 n I_max frequency controller proportional gain I_max_ctrl Kp Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group ...

Page 518: ...imitation control for a regenerative load is always implemented by influencing the frequency This current limiting function is deactivated with p1340 p1341 0 r1343 CO I_max controller frequency output I_max_ctrl f_outp Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6300 6850 Min rpm Max rpm Factory...

Page 519: ... Hz Factory setting 0 00 Hz Description Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U f control Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency Dependency See also p1338 Note For p1349 0 the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 of the rated motor frequency however to a max of 45 Hz p1400 0 n Speed control configuration n_ctrl config Access level 3 Calculated Data t...

Page 520: ...ent for limiting Enable Hold 6030 18 Reserved 19 Anti windup for integral component Yes No 6030 20 Acceleration model ON OFF 6031 21 Free Tn reduction active Yes No 6030 22 Reserved 25 Acceleration torque instantaneous in the I f mode Yes No Note For bit 16 When the bit is set the integral component of the speed controller is only held if it reaches the torque limit For bit 19 20 When this bit is ...

Page 521: ...ly deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed During a flying restart of a rotating motor see p1200 no quick magnetizing takes place For bit 09 Synchronous reluctance motor RESM Dynamic increase in the flux setpoint when torque is quickly established For bit 10 Synchronous reluctance motor RESM For load dependent optimum flux characteristic p1401 3 1 the flux setpoint is increased at low speeds For...

Page 522: ...ller speed actual value smoothing time sensorless n_C n_act T_s SL Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6020 6040 Min 0 00 ms Max 32000 00 ms Factory setting 10 00 ms Description Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed loop speed control N...

Page 523: ...it group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6050 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 0 00 rpm Description Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller No adaptation is effective below this speed Dependency See also p1461 p1463 p1465 Note If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464 t...

Page 524: ...d controller I torque output n_ctrl I M_outp Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2003 Dynamic index Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 5040 5042 5210 6030 6040 Min Nm Max Nm Factory setting Nm Description Display and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller r1493 CO Moment of inertia total scaled M_in...

Page 525: ... or the ramp function generator output is set r1199 3 This is used to avoid torque peaks Depending on the application it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp function generator tracking p1145 0 or the acceleration precontrol p1496 0 The acceleration precontrol is set to zero if the Vdc control is active r0056 14 15 Note The parameter is set to 100 by the rotating measurement refer to p19...

Page 526: ...ted CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2003 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6020 6630 Min 20000000 00 Nm Max 1000000 00 Nm Factory setting 0 00 Nm Description Sets the fixed lower torque limit Dependency See also p1520 p1522 p1523 DANGER Positive values when setting the lower torque limit p1521 0 can result in the mot...

Page 527: ...etting 100 0 Description Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit or the torque limit when motoring Dependency p1400 4 0 upper lower p1400 4 1 motoring regenerating NOTICE A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set Note This parameter can be freely interconnected The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from...

Page 528: ..._LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 14_5 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6640 Min 0 00 kW Max 100000 00 kW Factory setting 0 00 kW Description Sets the power limit when motoring Dependency See also p0500 p1531 Note The power limit is limited to 300 of the rated motor power p1531 0 n Power limit regenerative P_max gen Access level 2...

Page 529: ... re calculated using p0340 1 3 or 5 r1539 CO Lower effective torque limit M_max lower eff Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2003 Dynamic index Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6020 6640 Min Nm Max Nm Factory setting Nm Description Display and connector output for the actual effective lower torque limit Note The effective lower torque li...

Page 530: ...culated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6790 Min Max Factory setting Description The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor Displays the transition value for the start of the evaluation of the optimum flux characteristic The value is referred to the rated motor torque Note The transition value...

Page 531: ... for a synchronous reluctance motor The scaling allows the flux setpoint to be adapted when operating with load dependent optimum flux characteristic or with constant flux setpoint p1574 0 n Voltage reserve dynamic U_reserve dyn Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 5_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagra...

Page 532: ...index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6791 Min 0 ms Max 5000 ms Factory setting 4 ms Description The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor Sets the time constant for establishing the flux setpoint for a load dependent optimum flux characteristic Dependency See also p1578 Note To quickly establish the flux for torque changes an appropriately short time constant f...

Page 533: ... 0 Max 100 Factory setting 100 Description The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor Sets the lower limit of the flux setpoint to evaluate the optimum flux characteristic The value is referred to the rated motor flux p0357 r0331 p1582 0 n Flux setpoint smoothing time Flux setp T_smth Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_REG Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic ...

Page 534: ...ICE p1610 should always be set to at least 10 higher than the maximum steady state load that can occur Note For p1610 0 a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no load case ASM rated magnetizing current RESM no load magnetizing current For p1610 100 a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in ...

Page 535: ...n Motor model error threshold stall detection MotMod ThreshStall Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_REG Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 Max 1000 0 Factory setting 5 0 Description Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled If the error signal r1746 exceeds the parameterized erro...

Page 536: ...ontrolled for regenerative operation ASM Bit 8 1 Open loop speed controlled operation independent of the speed setpoint except for OFF3 ASM Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Controlled start Yes No 01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No 02 Closed loop ctrl oper down to zero freq for passive loads Yes No 03 Motor model Lh_pre f PsiEst Yes No 06 Closed loop open loop controlled PMSM for a...

Page 537: ...bit 7 is activated for applications that demand a high torque at low frequencies and at the same time require low speed gradients Adequate parameterization of the current setpoint must be ensured p1610 p1611 For bit 8 1 no influence on the functionality of bits 0 1 2 The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors Changeover into open loop speed controlled operation is no l...

Page 538: ...t T valve with Rs adaptation Yes No 10 Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time Yes No 11 Fast flying restart with voltage model for induction motor Yes No Dependency In the U f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 and bit 11 are relevant For active motor model feedback see p1784 the Lh adaptation is internally deactivated automatically Note When selecting the compensati...

Page 539: ...ndency Minimum pulse frequency p1800 12 p1082 r0313 60 See also p0230 Note The maximum and minimum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used minimum pulse frequency 2 kHz or 4 kHz When the pulse frequency is increased depending on the particular power unit the maximum output current can be reduced derating refer to r0067 If a sine wave filter is parameterized as outp...

Page 540: ...dulation the greater the current ripple and torque ripple When changing p1802 x the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed p1803 0 n Maximum modulation depth Modulat depth max Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6723 Min 20 0 Max 150 0 Factory settin...

Page 541: ...t control p1820 0 n Reverse the output phase sequence Outp_ph_seq rev Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor without setpoint change If the motor does not rotate in the required direction then the output phase se...

Page 542: ...n align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution With the following switch on command a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out and in addition a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds p1900 2 Sets p1910 1 and p1960 0 When the drive enable signals are present a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next sw...

Page 543: ...gram Min 0 Max 12 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary p1900 1 2 also refer to p1910 Based on this additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor rotating p1900 1 3 also refer to p1960 p1900 0 Functi...

Page 544: ...t occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification For U f control p1300 identification with speed controller optimization does not make sense e g P1900 1 p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration Test puls config Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 b...

Page 545: ...this is displayed in r1902 2 For bit 02 0 If the test was successful once after POWER ON see r1902 0 then it is not repeated For bit 02 1 The test is not only performed after POWER ON but also each time the pulses are enabled For chassis power units the ground fault is also determined using the summed output current see p0287 p1909 0 n Motor data identification control word MotID STW Access level ...

Page 546: ... n Motor data identification control word MotID STW CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description Sets the configuration for the motor data identification Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 sig...

Page 547: ... p0350 p0354 p0356 p0357 p0358 p0360 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 After this the control parameter p0340 3 is automatically calculated p1910 20 Only for internal SIEMENS use Value 0 Inhibited 1 Complete identification ID and acceptance of motor data 2 Complete identification ID of motor data without acceptance 20 Voltage vector input 21 Voltage vector input without filter 22 Rectangular voltage vector ...

Page 548: ...1 All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters p0350 p0354 p0356 p0357 p0358 p0360 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 After this the control parameter p0340 3 is automatically calculated p1910 20 Only for internal SIEMENS use Value 0 Inhibited 1 Complete identification ID and acceptance of motor data 2 Complete identification ID of mot...

Page 549: ...setting 0000 0000 0001 1110 bin Description Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No 02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No 03 Re calculates the speed controller parameters Yes No 04 Speed controller optimization vibration test Yes No 11 Do not change the controller parameters during the...

Page 550: ...otating measurement or speed controller optimization p1300 20 22 encoderless operation Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode Value 0 Inhibited 1 Rotating measurement in encoderless operation 3 Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation Dependency Before the rotating measurement is carried out the motor data identification rou...

Page 551: ...983 Note The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed n_opt speed Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 10 Max 75 Factory setting 40 Description Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and ...

Page 552: ...act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test Dependency See also p1959 p1967 See also F07985 Note This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960 p1980 0 ...

Page 553: ...hanges of the encoder status word bits can be better investigated using p7830 and following PolID Pole position identification p1998 0 n PolID circle center point PolID circ center Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0000 A Max 10000 0000 A Factory setting 0 0000 A Descr...

Page 554: ...rms Description Sets the reference quantity for voltages All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity This also applies for direct voltage values rms value like the DC link voltage The reference quantity corresponds to 100 or 4000 hex word or 4000 0000 hex double word Note This reference quantity also applies to direct voltage values It is not interpreted as rms...

Page 555: ...oatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group 7_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram Min 0 01 Nm Max 20000000 00 Nm Factory setting 1 00 Nm Description Sets the reference quantity for torque All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity The reference quantity corresponds to 100 or 4000 hex word or 4000 0000 hex double word Dependency This para...

Page 556: ...50 00 C Max 300 00 C Factory setting 100 00 C Description Sets the reference quantity for temperature All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity The reference quantity corresponds to 100 or 4000 hex word or 4000 0000 hex double word p2010 Comm IF baud rate Comm baud Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit g...

Page 557: ...m 9310 Min 4 Max 13 Factory setting 8 Description Sets the baud rate for the field bus interface RS485 Value 4 2400 baud 5 4800 baud 6 9600 baud 7 19200 baud 8 38400 baud 9 57600 baud 10 76800 baud 11 93750 baud 12 115200 baud 13 187500 baud Note Fieldbus IF Fieldbus interface Changes only become effective after POWER ON The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting The parameter ...

Page 558: ...USS the following applies Min max factory setting 0 31 0 When p2030 2 Modbus the following applies Min max factory setting 1 247 1 If p2030 5 BACnet the following applies Min max factory setting 0 127 1 If p2030 8 P1 the following applies Min max factory setting 1 99 99 p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no Field bus USS PZD Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic ...

Page 559: ...racter delay time 2 Telegram pause time Dependency See also p2020 p2030 Note For p2024 2 Modbus If the field bus baud rate is changed p2020 the default time setting is restored The default setting corresponds to a time of 3 5 characters dependent on the baud rate that has been set p2025 0 4 Fieldbus interface BACnet settings BACnet setting Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be chan...

Page 560: ...e BACnet COV increment BACnet COV incr Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 Max 4194303 Factory setting 1 Description Sets BACnet COV change of value increment values Parameters 7 3 Parameters SINAMICS G120XA converter 558 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 561: ...lue 15 25 Analog Value 16 26 Analog Value 17 27 Analog Value 18 28 Analog Value 19 29 Analog Value 20 30 Analog Value 21 31 Analog Value 22 32 Analog Value 25 33 Analog Value 28 34 Analog Value 29 35 Analog Value 30 36 Analog Value 31 37 Analog Value 32 38 Analog Value 33 39 Analog Value 34 40 Analog Value 39 41 Analog Value 40 42 Analog Value 41 43 Analog Value 5000 44 Analog Value 5001 45 Analog...

Page 562: ...t language selection BACnet language Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the language for the BACnet object properties Value 0 German 1 English Note Changes only become effective after POWER ON r2029 0 7 Field bus interface error statistics Field bus err...

Page 563: ...s level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the parity for the Modbus protocol p2030 2 Value 0 No parity 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity Note Fieldbus IF Fieldbus interface Changes only become effective after POWER ON The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory s...

Page 564: ...ram 9310 Min 0 ms Max 1999999 ms Factory setting 1000 ms Description Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface If no process data is received within this time then an appropriate message is output Dependency See also F01910 Note p2040 0 Monitoring is deactivated For p2030 2 Modbus RTU or p2030 5 BACnet MS TP the following deviation applies Factory set...

Page 565: ...ed Data type Unsigned32 Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling 4000H Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2450 2470 9370 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Selects the PZD actual values with word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller Index 0 PZD 1 1 PZD 2 2 PZD 3 3 PZD 4 4 PZD 5 5 PZD 6 6 PZD 7 7 PZD 8 8 PZD 9 9 PZD 10 10 PZD 11 11 PZD 12 12 PZD 13 13 PZD 14 14 PZD 15 1...

Page 566: ...name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 ON OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF r2057 Fieldbus address switch diagnostics Addr_switch diag Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be...

Page 567: ...10 9 PZD 10 11 10 PZD 11 12 Dependency See also r2050 NOTICE Where there is a multiple interconnection of a connector output all the connector inputs must either have Integer or FloatingPoint data types A BICO interconnection for a single PZD can only take place either on r2050 or r2060 p2061 0 15 CI PROFIdrive PZD send double word PZD send DW Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Integer...

Page 568: ...ulated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2470 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the PZD actual values with double word format sent to the fieldbus controller Index 0 PZD 1 2 1 PZD 2 3 2 PZD 3 4 3 PZD 4 5 4 PZD 5 6 5 PZD 6 7 6 PZD 7 8 7 PZD 8 9 8 PZD 9 10 9 PZD 10 11 10 PZD 11 12 11 PZD 12 13 12 PZD 13 14 13 PZD 14 15 14 ...

Page 569: ...ccess level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display for the maximum interconnected PZD in the receive send direction Index 0 receive r2050 r2060 Index 1 send p2051 p2061 p2080 0 15 BI Binector connector converter status word 1 Bin con ZSW1 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsign...

Page 570: ...nged T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller The individual bits are combined to form status word 2 Index 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 2 3 Bit 3 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 5 6 Bit 6 7 Bit 7 8 Bit 8 9 Bit 9 10 Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r20...

Page 571: ... Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r2089 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p2083 0 15 BI Binector connector converter status word 4 Bin con ZSW4 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max...

Page 572: ...dual bits are combined to form free status word 5 Index 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 2 3 Bit 3 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 5 6 Bit 6 7 Bit 7 8 Bit 8 9 Bit 9 10 Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r2089 p2088 0 4 Invert binector connector converter status word Bin con ZSW inv Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group...

Page 573: ...rted Not inverted Dependency See also p2080 p2081 p2082 p2083 r2089 r2089 0 4 CO Send binector connector converter status word Bin con ZSW send Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max Factory setting Description Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word Index 0 Status word...

Page 574: ... OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF r2091 0 15 BO PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit serial PZD2 recv bitw Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index U...

Page 575: ...F 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF r2093 0 15 BO PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit serial PZD4 recv bitw Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit...

Page 576: ...word received from the PROFIdrive controller The PZD is selected via p2099 0 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 ON OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF Dependency See...

Page 577: ... 0000 bin Description Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector binector converter Using p2098 0 the signals of connector input p2099 0 are influenced Using p2098 1 the signals of connector input p2099 1 are influenced Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted 01 Bit 1 Inverted Not inverted 02 Bit 2 Inverted Not inverted 03 Bit 3 Inverte...

Page 578: ...50 8075 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed Dependency The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index See also p2101 Note Re parameterization is also possible if a fault is present The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved p2101 0 19 Change fault response response Chng...

Page 579: ...otors p2103 0 n BI 1st acknowledge faults 1st acknowledge Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2441 2442 2443 2447 2475 2546 9220 9677 9678 Min Max Factory setting 722 5 Description Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p09...

Page 580: ...lt 2 External fault 2 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2546 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for external fault 2 Dependency See also F07861 Note An external fault is triggered with a 1 0 signal p2108 0 n BI External fault 3 External fault 3 Access level 3 ...

Page 581: ...ntime in milliseconds when the fault was removed Dependency See also r0945 r0947 r0948 r0949 r2130 r2133 r2136 p8400 NOTICE The time comprises r2136 days and r2109 milliseconds Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945 r2110 0 63 Alarm number Alarm number ...

Page 582: ...agram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit The time comprises r2114 0 milliseconds and r2114 1 days After r2114 0 has reached a value of 86 400 000 ms 24 hours this value is reset and r2114 1 is incremented Index 0 Milliseconds 1 Days Dependency See also r0948 r2109 r2123 r2125 r2130 r2136 r2145 r2146 Note When the electronic power supply is swit...

Page 583: ...Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8050 8075 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed Dependency Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index See also p2119 Note Re parameterization is also possible if a m...

Page 584: ...t have occurred Dependency See also r2110 r2123 r2124 r2125 r2134 r2145 r2146 r3121 r3123 NOTICE The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 Alarm buffer structure general principle r2122 0 r2124 0 r2123 0 r2125 0 alarm 1 the oldest r2122 7 r2124 7...

Page 585: ... 8050 8065 Min ms Max ms Factory setting ms Description Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared Dependency See also r2110 r2122 r2123 r2124 r2134 r2145 r2146 p8400 NOTICE The time comprises r2146 days and r2125 milliseconds Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 The structure of the alarm buffer and the ass...

Page 586: ...knowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON p2128 0 15 Faults alarms trigger selection F A trigger sel Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8050 8070 Min 0 Max 65535 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the faults alarms for which a trigger signal should be generated in r2129 0 15 Dependency ...

Page 587: ...e in days when the fault occurred Dependency See also r0945 r0947 r0948 r0949 r2109 r2133 r2136 p8401 NOTICE The time comprises r2130 days and r0948 milliseconds The value displayed in r2130 refers to January 1 1970 Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 r2131 CO Actual fault code Act fault code Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsign...

Page 588: ...dated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 r2135 12 15 CO BO Status word faults alarms 2 ZSW fault alarm 2 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2548 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the second status word of faults and alarms Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 sig...

Page 589: ...unction diagram 2548 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for status word 1 of faults and alarms Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Being acknowledged Yes No 01 Acknowledgment required Yes No 03 Fault present Yes No 8060 06 Internal message 1 present Yes No 07 Alarm present Yes No 8065 08 Internal message 2 present Yes No 11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low 12 Alarm...

Page 590: ...2 0 n Hysteresis speed 1 n_hysteresis 1 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8010 Min 0 00 rpm Max 300 00 rpm Factory setting 2 00 rpm Description Sets the hysteresis speed bandwidth for the signal f or n v comparison value reached or exceeded BO r2199 1 Dependenc...

Page 591: ...days and r2125 milliseconds Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 p2148 0 n BI RFG active RFG active Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8011 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for th...

Page 592: ... level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8010 8011 8022 Min 0 00 rpm Max 300 00 rpm Factory setting 2 00 rpm Description Sets the hysteresis speed bandwidth for the following signals n_act speed threshold value 3 BO r2199 0 n_set 0 BO r2198 5 n_act 0 BO r2197 3 Dependency S...

Page 593: ...ess level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8010 Min 0 0 ms Max 10000 0 ms Factory setting 0 0 ms Description Sets the switch in delay time for the signal comparison value reached BO r2199 1 Dependency See also p2141 p2142 r2199 p2161 0 n Speed threshold 3 n_thresh val 3 Access level 3 Calculated CAL...

Page 594: ...for the speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off signal message BO r2197 7 Dependency See also p2164 p2166 r2197 p2164 0 n Hysteresis speed 4 n_hysteresis 4 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8011 Min 0 00 rpm Max 200 00 rpm Factory setting 2 00 ...

Page 595: ...threshold Stall_mon M_thresh Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8013 Min 0 00 Nm Max 20000000 00 Nm Factory setting 10000000 00 Nm Description Sets the torque threshold of the stall monitoring of the pump or fan If in the monitored speed range from p2182 to p2165 the torque exce...

Page 596: ... Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8022 Min 0 ms Max 10000 ms Factory setting 10 ms Description Sets the delay time for the comparison of the current actual value r0068 with the current threshold value p2170 Dependency See also p2170 p2172 0 n DC link voltage threshold value Vdc thresh val Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2001 Dynamic index D...

Page 597: ... following applies for sensorless vector control At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open loop speed controlled operation If this is the case the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly p2177 p1758 before time p2177 has elapsed in order to detect the locked state reliably As countermeasure it is generally also possible to set p1750 6 This is only not permit...

Page 598: ... selection Function diagram 8022 Min 0 ms Max 10000 ms Factory setting 2000 ms Description Sets the delay time for the message output load not available r2197 11 1 Dependency See also p2179 p2181 0 n Load monitoring response Load monit resp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8013 Min 0 Max 8 Fa...

Page 599: ...hanged T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8013 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 900 00 rpm Description Sets the speed torque envelope curve for load monitoring The envelope curve upper and lower envelope curve is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds p2182 n_threshold 1 p2185 M_threshold 1 upper p2186 M_threshold 1 lower ...

Page 600: ...level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8013 Min 0 00 Nm Max 20000000 00 Nm Factory setting 0 00 Nm Description Sets the speed torque envelope curve for load monitoring Dependency The following applies p2186 p2185 See also p2182 p2185 See also A07926 Note The lower envelope curve is defined...

Page 601: ...e also p2184 p2190 See also A07926 Note The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185 p2187 and p2189 p2190 0 n Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower M_thresh 3 lower Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8013 Min 0 00 Nm Max 20000000 00 Nm Factory setting 0 00 Nm Description Set...

Page 602: ...g torque and load drop 2 Monitoring speed and load drop 3 Monitoring load drop 4 Monitoring pump and load failure 5 Monitoring fan and load failure Dependency See also p2182 p2183 p2184 p2185 p2186 p2187 p2188 p2189 p2190 p2192 r2198 p3230 p3231 p3232 See also A07891 A07892 A07893 F07894 F07895 F07896 F07898 A07920 A07921 A07922 F07923 F07924 F07925 F07936 Note p2193 4 5 can only be combined with ...

Page 603: ... p1228 For bit 06 The hysteresis is set in p2162 For bit 07 The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164 For bit 08 The threshold value is set in p2170 and the delay time in p2171 For bit 09 10 The threshold value is set in p2172 and the delay time in p2173 For bit 11 The threshold value is set in p2179 and the delay time in p2180 For bit 13 Only for internal Siemens use ...

Page 604: ...Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to switch in switch out the technology controller The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal p2201 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 1 Tec_ctrl fix val1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint3...

Page 605: ...ts the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller Dependency See also p2220 p2221 p2222 p2223 r2224 r2229 NOTICE A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set p2205 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 5 Tec_ctr fix val 5 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index ...

Page 606: ...interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set p2209 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 9 Tec_ctr fix val 9 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 90 00 Description Sets t...

Page 607: ...ata set always acts on the effective data set p2213 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 13 Tec_ctr fix val 13 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 130 00 Description Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology control...

Page 608: ... 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7950 7951 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller Dependency See also p2221 p2222 p2223 p2221 0 n BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 Access level 3 Calcula...

Page 609: ...ry setting Description Display and BICO output for the status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No 7950 7951 r2229 Technology controller number actual Tec_ctrl No act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selecti...

Page 610: ...the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion for p2230 0 1 For bit 04 When the bit is set the ramp function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250 r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory Tec_ctrl mop mem Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be ch...

Page 611: ...ingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7954 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller Dependency See also p2237 p2240 0 n Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value Tec_ctrl mop start Access level 2 Calculat...

Page 612: ...technology controller Dependency See also p2247 Note The time is referred to 100 When the initial rounding off is activated p2230 2 1 the ramp down is correspondingly extended r2250 CO Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG Tec_ctr mop aftRFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p059...

Page 613: ... when setting the PID controller parameters p2280 p2285 The enable ramps of the PID controller are ensured in this setting by p1120 p1121 as well as rounding functions p1130 and p1131 The ramp up ramp down time of the PID controller limiting p2293 must be set appropriately shorter as otherwise this has an impact on the speed setpoint channel For bit 05 0 The integral component of the PID controlle...

Page 614: ...et2 scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller Dependency See also p2254 p2257 Technology controller ramp up time Tec_ctrl t_ramp up Access level 2 Calculated Data type Floating...

Page 615: ...ted Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7958 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter PT1 of the technology controller p2263 Technology controller type Tec_ctrl type Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling...

Page 616: ...ription Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller Dependency See also p2264 p2265 p2271 See also F07426 NOTICE If the actual value exceeds this upper limit this results in fault F07426 p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value Tec_ctrl l_lim act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit g...

Page 617: ...ion 1 Inversion actual value signal CAUTION If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected then the closed loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate Note The correct setting can be determined as follows inhibit the technology controller p2200 0 increase the motor speed and in so doing measure the actual value signal of the technology controller If the...

Page 618: ...280 0 The proportional gain is disabled p2285 Technology controller integral time Tec_ctrl Tn Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 000 s Max 10000 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the integral time I component integrating time constant of the technology controller NOTICE The...

Page 619: ...Sets the signal source to enable the technology controller output The technology controller output is enabled with a 1 signal The technology controller output is held with a 0 signal p2291 CO Technology controller maximum limiting Tec_ctrl max_lim Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min...

Page 620: ...Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 100 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller p2296 0 n CI Technology controller output scaling Tec_ctrl outp scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic ind...

Page 621: ...el 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller If the drive is switched on and the technology controller is already enabled see p2200 r0056 3 then its output signal r2294 first goes to the start val...

Page 622: ...pump compressor If value 1 The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases e g for cooling fans discharge pumps p2310 CI Technology controller Kp adaptation input value signal source Kp adapt inp s_src Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min Max Factory set...

Page 623: ...g point must be set higher than the lower starting point p2314 p2313 Note Kp adaptation is activated with p2252 7 1 p2314 Technology controller Kp adaptation upper starting point Kp adapt upper pt Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min 0 00 Max 400 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description...

Page 624: ... Tn adaptation is activated with p2252 8 1 p2318 Technology controller Tn adaptation lower value Tn adapt lower val Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min 0 000 s Max 60 000 s Factory setting 3 000 s Description Sets the lower value for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology con...

Page 625: ...ion point for the adaptation of integral time Tn for the technology controller Dependency See also p2317 p2318 p2319 p2320 r2322 CAUTION The upper starting point must be set higher than the lower starting point p2321 p2320 Note Tn adaptation is activated with p2252 8 1 r2322 CO Technology controller Tn adaptation output Tn adapt output Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be cha...

Page 626: ...lt response see p2345 Dependency See also p2345 Note Smoothing time 10 s p2345 Technology controller fault response Tech_ctrl flt resp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the response of the technology controller to the occurrence of fault F07426 technol...

Page 627: ...oller RFG bypassed in the setpoint channel Yes No 06 Technology controller starting value at the current limit No Yes 07 Technology controller output negative Yes No 08 Technology controller actual value at the minimum Yes No 09 Technology controller actual value at the maximum Yes No 10 Technology controller output at the minimum Yes No 11 Technology controller output at the maximum Yes No 12 Fau...

Page 628: ...T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 60 s Max 65000 s Factory setting 240 s Description Sets the monitoring time for the PID autotuning This time is started after activating PID autotuning p2350 If within this time the control loop is not excited then the automatic setting is canceled and an appropriate fault is output Dependency See also p2350 See also F07445 p23...

Page 629: ...le During this time the technology controller is switched off Switching off the motor If the main drive is operated at minimum speed and the deviation at the technology controller input decreases further the control will disconnect external motors M1 through M3 from the line voltage At the same time the main drive is ramped up to the closed loop cascade control switch in switch out speed p2378 via...

Page 630: ...ime longer than that set in p2382 are interchanged automatically For p2372 2 3 This automatic interchange autochange is only possible if the designated motor is not in operation If all motors are in operation the interchange will not be possible and alarm A07427 appears Autochange mode is only possible if p2371 2 4 motors of the same size p2373 Closed loop cascade control switch in threshold Csc_c...

Page 631: ... delay time p2374 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched in connected If the minimum speed is reached and the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p2376 at the same time the delay time p2375 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched out disconnected p2377 Closed loop cascade control interlocking time Csc_ctrl t_interl Access level 3 Calc...

Page 632: ...for the external motors The display can only be reset to zero Index 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 2 Motor 3 p2381 Closed loop cascade control max time for continuous operation Csc_ctrl t_max Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 1 h Max 100000 0 h Factory setting 24 0 h Description Time limit for the cont...

Page 633: ...g 0 000 s Description Delay time once the switch in conditions have been met until the external motor is switched on The activation of the corresponding status bit r2379 for controlling the contactors or the motor starter is delayed by this time while the main motor speed already decreases down to the switch in speed p2378 p2385 Closed loop cascade control holding time switch in speed Csc_ctr t_hl...

Page 634: ... setpoint exceeds the restart threshold Note The speed at which the hibernation mode is started is set to 4 of the nominal speed when commissioning is completed p2391 0 n Hibernation mode delay time Hib mode t_delay Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7038 Min 0 s Max 3599 s Factory settin...

Page 635: ... the boost speed p2395 for the time set in p2394 Depending on the application this allows the hibernation intervals to be extended in time CAUTION The controller is not operational while the boost speed is being impressed As a result for example for pump applications it must be ensured that the tank does not overflow as a result of the additional boost For compressors it must be ensured that the b...

Page 636: ...the tank does not overflow or for compressors an overpressure condition does not occur Note Automatic restart once the maximum OFF time has elapsed is deactivated by setting p2396 0 s r2397 0 1 CO Hibernation mode output speed actual Hib n_outp act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 703...

Page 637: ...tion mode delay active Yes No 03 Hibernation boost active Yes No 04 Hibernation mode motor switched off Yes No 05 Hibernation mode switched off cyclic restart active Yes No 06 Hibernation motor motor restarts Yes No 07 Hibernation mode supplies total setpoint for ramp fct generator Yes No 08 Hibernation mode bypasses ramp fct generator in setpoint channel Yes No Dependency See also p2398 See also ...

Page 638: ...n Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for frequently used percentage values Index 0 Fixed value 0 1 Fixed value 5 2 Fixed value 10 3 Fixed value 20 4 Fixed value 50 5 Fixed value 100 6 Fixed value 150 7 Fixed value 200 8 Fixed value 5 9 Fixed value 10 10 Fixed value 20 11 Fixed value 50 12 Fixed value 100 13 Fixed value 150 14 Fixed value 200 Dependency See also p2900 p290...

Page 639: ...pect to the direct axis current for iq 0 5 p2950 r2969 3 flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq p2950 For index 4 5 6 Displays the relative error of the current inversion id psid iq id p2950 r2969 4 error with respect to direct axis current for iq 0 r2969 5 error with respect to direct axis current for iq 0 5 p2950 r2969 6 error with respect to direct axis current for iq p295...

Page 640: ...operation BI p2108 negated BI p3111 BI p3112 negated Dependency See also p2108 p3110 p3111 See also F07862 r3113 0 15 CO BO NAMUR message bit bar NAMUR bit bar Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the status of the NAMUR message bit bar The fault...

Page 641: ...errupted Check the state of the higher level control system Check the communication connection wiring Check the bus configuration clock cycles For bit 08 A safety operation monitoring function Safety has detected an error For bit 09 When evaluating the encoder signals track signals zero marks absolute values an illegal signal state was detected Check the encoder state of the encoder signals Observ...

Page 642: ...Unit 2 Power Module 3 Motor Dependency See also r2110 r2122 r2123 r2124 r2125 r2134 r2145 r2146 r3123 Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122 r3122 0 63 Diagnostic attribute fault Diag_attr fault Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be chan...

Page 643: ...t faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 0 PROFIdrive message class 14 braking controller Braking Module faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 1 PROFIdrive message class 15 line filter faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 0 0 0 PROFIdrive message class 16 external measured value signal state outside the permissible range Bits 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 0 0 1 PROFIdrive message class 17 application technology functi...

Page 644: ...lue speed actual value or not available Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 0 0 PROFIdrive message class 12 internal DRIVE CLiQ communication error Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 0 1 PROFIdrive message class 13 infeed unit faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 0 PROFIdrive message class 14 braking controller Braking Module faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 1 PROFIdrive message class 15 line filter faulted Bits 2...

Page 645: ...69 p2181 p2193 p3230 See also A07920 A07921 A07922 F07923 F07924 F07925 p3232 0 n BI Load monitoring failure detection Load_moni fail_det Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8013 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for detecting a failure Dependency See also p219...

Page 646: ...ated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6722 6837 Min 10 0 Max 200 0 Factory setting 110 0 Description Sets the maximum limit value for the calculated optimum flux Dependency See also p1401 r3313 p3315 Note The function is activated via p1401 14 1 p3320 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 1 Fluid_mach P1 Access lev...

Page 647: ...achine power point 2 Fluid_mach P2 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 50 00 Description For the energy saving display of a fluid flow machine a typical flow characteristic P f n with 5 points along the characteristic is required This parameter specifies...

Page 648: ...00 Factory setting 50 00 Description For the energy saving display of a fluid flow machine a typical flow characteristic P f n with 5 points along the characteristic is required This parameter specifies the speed n of point 3 as a Dependency See also r0041 p3320 p3321 p3322 p3323 p3324 p3326 p3327 p3328 p3329 Note The reference value for power and speed is the rated power rated speed The energy sa...

Page 649: ... 5 as a Dependency See also r0041 p3320 p3321 p3322 p3323 p3324 p3325 p3326 p3327 p3329 Note The reference value for power and speed is the rated power rated speed The energy saved is displayed in r0041 p3329 0 n Fluid flow machine speed point 5 Fluid_mach n5 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function di...

Page 650: ...cy See also p0015 p3330 p3331 r3333 Note The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015 r3333 0 3 CO BO 2 3 wire control control word 2 3 wire STW Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2272 2273 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the control word for the tw...

Page 651: ...ax Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for the limit switch minus BI p3343 1 signal Limit switch is inactive BI p3343 0 signal Limit switch is active Dependency See also p3340 p3342 r3344 Note For p1113 0 the drive traverses with a negative speed setpoint towards the minus limit switch or for p1113 1 with a positive speed setpoint r3344 0 5 CO BO Limit switch status word Lim sw ZS...

Page 652: ... executed when commissioning the power unit p0010 2 The function is automatically deactivated p3380 0 once commissioning has been exited p0010 0 Procedure when forming 1 Activate power unit commissioning p0010 2 2 Activate forming p3380 0 value see recommendation 3 Switch on the drive unit p0840 0 1 signal 4 Wait for forming to be completed r3381 0 5 Exit power unit commissioning p0010 0 See also ...

Page 653: ...0 and reactivated again using p0840 For bit 03 1 Forming was not able to be successfully performed within the set duration This status is displayed using fault F07390 p3855 0 n DC quantity controller configuration Rect_ctrl config Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6797 6844 6...

Page 654: ... p0300 2xx NOTICE Generally increasing the braking current improves the braking effect when stopping the motor However if the value is set too high then the drive can be tripped shut down as a result of overcurrent or ground fault Recommendation p3856 100 x r0209 r0331 p0305 2 Compound braking generates a current in the motor with a ripple manifesting the rotational frequency The higher the brakin...

Page 655: ...g to extract smoke BI p3880 1 signal The essential service mode is activated BI p3880 0 signal The essential service mode is deactivated Dependency See also p3881 p3882 p3883 p3884 r3889 WARNING When activating the essential service mode BI p3880 1 signal the motor immediately runs according to the selected setpoint source When the essential service mode is activated the motor cannot be stopped us...

Page 656: ...ng 0 Description Sets the alternative setpoint source for essential service mode ESM This setpoint is used when the setpoint source set in p3881 is lost Value 0 Last known setpoint r1078 smoothed 1 Fixed speed setpoint 15 p1015 2 Maximum speed p1082 Dependency See also p3881 Note ESM Essential Service Mode The alternative setpoint source is only active for p3881 2 3 4 p3883 BI ESM direction of rot...

Page 657: ...n Display and BICO output for the status word of the essential service mode ESM Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Essential service mode ESM activated Yes No 01 Direction of rotation inverted Yes No 02 Setpoint signal lost Yes No 03 Technology controller actual value p2264 lost Yes No 04 Bypass active Yes No 05 Setpoint technology controller parameterized p3884 Yes No 06 Technology...

Page 658: ...ating motor open loop and closed loop control parameters such as for p0340 1 parameters associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten If a catalog motor has not been selected p0300 then the following parameters are reset with p3900 0 in order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time induction motor p0320 p0352 p0362 p0369 p0604 p0...

Page 659: ...Yes No 19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No 20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No 21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No 22 Only identify circle Yes No 23 Deactivate circle identification Yes No 24 Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Yes No Dependency See also r3925 Note The parameter is a copy of p1909 r3928 0 n Rotating measurement configuration Rot meas config Ac...

Page 660: ... Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description Sets the options for the Power Module 330 PM330 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Line filter Yes No 01 Line Harmonics Filter Yes No 02 du dt filter compact Voltage Peak Limiter Yes No 03 Motor reactor Yes No 04 du dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter Yes No 05 w o line reactor Yes No 07 EmergOff button Ye...

Page 661: ...set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge After acknowledgment the parameter is automatically reset to 0 p3985 Master control mode selection PcCtrl mode select Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the mode to change over the master control LOCAL mode Value 0 Change maste...

Page 662: ...of the PM330 power unit Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X9 3 external alarm High Low 01 DI 1 X9 4 external fault High Low 02 DI 2 X9 5 Emergency Off category 0 High Low 03 DI 3 X9 6 Emergency Off category 1 High Low Dependency See also r4023 Note DI Digital Input r4023 0 3 CO BO PM330 digital inputs status inverted PM330 DI stat inv CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculat...

Page 663: ...DI 2 X9 5 Emergency Off category 0 Simulation Terminal eval 03 DI 3 X9 6 Emergency Off category 1 Simulation Terminal eval Dependency The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096 See also p4096 Note This parameter is not saved when data is backed up p0971 p0977 DI Digital Input p4096 PM330 digital inputs simulation mode setpoint PM330 DI sim setp CUG120XA_USS PM330 Access level 3 Ca...

Page 664: ...ion Note Temperature model 1 I2t The following applies for firmware version 4 7 SP6 or p0612 8 0 parameter p5350 is not active Internally a fixed boost factor of 1 333 is used as basis for the calculation The following applies from firmware version 4 7 SP6 and p0612 8 1 parameter p5350 becomes active as described above r5389 0 8 CO BO Mot_temp status word faults alarms Mot_temp ZSW F A Access leve...

Page 665: ...eshold is exceeded when commissioning a catalog motor for the first time the threshold value is copied from p0605 to p5390 The following applies for temperature model 3 after the alarm threshold is exceeded alarm A07012 is output and a calculated delay time t p5371 p5381 is started if the delay time has expired and the alarm threshold has in the meantime not been fallen below then fault F07011 is ...

Page 666: ..._no Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices For the commissioning software the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded Dependency S...

Page 667: ...d deactivated via p7761 on the Control Unit For bit 01 The know how protection can be activated by entering a password p7766 p7768 For bit 02 If it has already been activated know how protection can be temporarily deactivated by entering the valid password in p7766 In this case bit 1 0 and bit 2 1 offset For bit 03 Know how protection cannot be deactivated as p7766 is not entered in the OEM except...

Page 668: ...ccess dependent on p7761 Dependency See also r7760 p7761 p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 KHP OEM qty p7764 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 Max 500 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list p7764 0 n p7764 0 n with n p7763 1 D...

Page 669: ...ard Yes No 02 Permit trace and measuring functions for diagnostic purposes Yes No Dependency See also p7766 p7767 p7768 Note KHP Know How Protection For copy protection the serial numbers of the memory card and or Control Unit are checked The memory card copy protection and preventing data to be traced are only effective when the know how protection has been activated For bit 00 01 If both bits ar...

Page 670: ...d for know how protection Dependency See also p7766 p7768 Note KHP Know How Protection When reading p7767 0 29 42 dec ASCII character is displayed p7768 0 29 KHP password confirmation KHP passw confirm Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Confirms the new password for k...

Page 671: ... the device 10 Error when clearing 11 Error when backing up memory card not available 12 Error when backing up insufficient memory space 13 Error when backing up 14 Error when importing memory card not available 15 Error when importing checksum error 16 Error when importing no NVRAM data available 17 Error when importing NOTICE For value 2 3 These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibite...

Page 672: ...ice Depending on the drive device being used the memory medium is a memory card or an internal non volatile device memory Index 0 Internal 1 External 2 Parameter backup Note For index 0 Displays the internal firmware version e g 04402315 This firmware version is the version of the memory card device memory and not the CU firmware r0018 however normally they have the same versions For index 1 Displ...

Page 673: ...ess level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 9999 Factory setting 0 1 1 1 2 1970 Description Sets and displays the date on the real time clock in year month and day The date is stored in the internal clock block in the drive and continues to run even if the supply voltage for the Control Unit is interrupte...

Page 674: ...splaying the fault time and alarm time the switchover to daylight saving time is not taken into account There must be at least two months between the start and end of daylight saving time For index 0 0 daylight saving time switchover deactivated 1 3 time difference For indices 1 and 5 1 January 12 December For indices 2 and 6 1 from the 1st to the 7th of the month 2 from the 8th to the 14th of the...

Page 675: ...lock p8405 Activate deactivate RTC alarm A01098 RTC A01098 act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 1 Description Sets whether the real time clock outputs an alarm if the time is not synchronized e g if the power supply was switched off for an extended period Value 0 Alarm A01098 ...

Page 676: ...TC DTC1 weekday of activation RTC DTC1 day act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the weekday on which timer 1 is activated DTC1 The switch on off time is set in p8411 p8412 and the result displayed via binector output r8413 Value 0 Weekday deactivated 1 Weekd...

Page 677: ...C Real time clock r8413 0 1 BO RTC DTC1 output RTC DTC1 output Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and binector output for the output of time switch 1 DTC1 Where a weekday is deactivated the following applies p8410 the binector output for this timer is inactive r84...

Page 678: ...RTC DTC2 switch on time RTC DTC2 t_ON Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 59 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the switch on time in hours and minutes for time switch 2 DTC2 BO r8423 1 signal The condition for the set weekday p8420 and switch on time has been fulfilled Index 0 Hour 0 23 1 Minute...

Page 679: ... Where a weekday is activated the following applies p8420 the ON OFF time setting p8421 p8422 for this timer has an instant effect on the binector output r8423 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Timer on Yes No 01 Timer ON negated No Yes Dependency See also p8409 p8420 p8421 p8422 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time ...

Page 680: ...fulfilled Index 0 Hour 0 23 1 Minute 0 59 Dependency See also p8409 p8430 r8433 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock p8432 0 1 RTC DTC3 off time RTC DTC3 t_OFF Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 59 Factory setting 0 Descript...

Page 681: ... p8409 p8430 p8431 p8432 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock r8540 0 15 BO STW1 from IOP in the manual mode STW1 IOP Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description For the manual mode the STW1 control word 1 ent...

Page 682: ...ction diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 8540 0 1 8540 1 2 8540 2 3 8540 3 4 8540 4 5 8540 5 6 8540 6 7 8540 7 8 8540 8 9 8540 9 10 8540 10 11 8540 11 12 8540 12 13 8540 13 14 8540 14 15 8540 15 Description For the manual mode Setting of the signal sources for STW1 control word 1 Index 0 ON OFF1 1 OC OFF2 2 OC OFF3 3 Enable operation 4 Enable ramp function generator 5 Continue ramp function generat...

Page 683: ...ed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 r8570 0 39 Macro drive object Macro DO Access level 1 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card device memory Dependen...

Page 684: ...t be removed safely Removal may destroy the file system on the memory card It may be necessary to set p9400 2 again Value 0 No memory card inserted 1 Memory card inserted 2 Request safe removal of the memory card 3 Safe removal possible 100 Safe removal not possible due to access Dependency See also r9401 NOTICE Removing the memory card without a request p9400 2 and confirmation p9400 3 may destro...

Page 685: ...signal source BICO S_src srch Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source BO CO parameter BICO coded to search in the signal sinks The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 BICO coded and the search result is specified using the...

Page 686: ...ose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible Dependency See also r9926 See also A01016 Note The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code r9926 Firmware check status FW check status Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays t...

Page 687: ...oller 0 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 3 Parame...

Page 688: ...mp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 0 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11049 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 0 status word Ftec0 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32...

Page 689: ...ion Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11057 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11060 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec0 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Uni...

Page 690: ...free technology controller 0 p11065 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec0 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 0 p110...

Page 691: ...nit group 9_2 Unit selection p11026 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 0 p11074 Free tec_ctrl 0 differentiation time constant Ftec0 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 0...

Page 692: ...ys be greater than the minimum limit p11091 p11092 p11092 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum Ftec0 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11091 Note ...

Page 693: ... Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11092 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11092 p11099 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 limit offset signal source Ftec0 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit ...

Page 694: ...ntroller 1 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 3 Par...

Page 695: ..._samp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 1 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11149 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 1 status word Ftec1 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigne...

Page 696: ...tion Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11157 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11160 CO Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec1 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Uni...

Page 697: ...free technology controller 1 p11165 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec1 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 1 p111...

Page 698: ...nit group 9_3 Unit selection p11126 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 1 p11174 Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant Ftec1 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 0...

Page 699: ...ys be greater than the minimum limit p11191 p11192 p11192 CO Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum Ftec1 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11191 Note ...

Page 700: ... Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11192 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11192 p11199 CI Free tec_ctrl 1 limit offset signal source Ftec1 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit ...

Page 701: ...ntroller 2 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 3 Par...

Page 702: ..._samp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 2 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11249 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 2 status word Ftec2 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigne...

Page 703: ...ction Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11257 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11260 CO Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec2 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Un...

Page 704: ...free technology controller 2 p11265 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec2 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 2 p112...

Page 705: ...nit group 9_4 Unit selection p11226 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 2 p11274 Free tec_ctrl 2 differentiation time constant Ftec2 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 0...

Page 706: ...ys be greater than the minimum limit p11291 p11292 p11292 CO Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum Ftec2 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11291 Note ...

Page 707: ...ata type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11292 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11292 p11299 CI Free tec_ctrl 2 limit offset signal source Ftec2 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 ...

Page 708: ... used as multi pump control Value 0 NONE 1 M1 1X 2 M1 1X M2 1X 3 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X 4 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X M4 1X Note 1X means motor power that configured in P307 Currently multi pump control only support that all motors should have the same power p29522 Multi pump control motor selection mode Mpc mtr sel mode Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit gr...

Page 709: ...namic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 s Max 650 s Factory setting 30 s Description Additional delay time for switch out motor after the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the threshold p29523 and the motor has reached the speed threshold p1080 P29528 Dependency Refer to P29523 P29526 Note If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the...

Page 710: ...threshold p1080 p29528 a motor will be switched out r29529 0 7 CO BO Multi pump control status word Mpc ZSW Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the status word of the multi pump control Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Start motor 1 Yes No 01 Star...

Page 711: ...when the first motor connecting with the mians is switched off The time set in p29537 is applied as a delay time between the disconnection of each line motor Then speed regulated motor is ramp down following OFF1 behavior In the case of OFF2 and OFF3 the motors connecting to the line are switched off immediately with the OFF command same behavior as with p29533 0 Then the inverter controlled motor...

Page 712: ...ump control service mode enable Mpc SerMode enab Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Enables the multi pump control service mode 0 Service mode inhibited 1 Service mode enabled Value 0 disable 1 enable Note When a pump is in service mode the inverter locks the corre...

Page 713: ...d under repair r29544 1 1 Motor 2 is interlocked under repair r29544 2 1 Motor 3 is interlocked under repair r29544 3 1 Motor 4 is interlocked under repair r29545 CO BO Multi pump control bypass command Mpc bypass cmd Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Dispalys the signal...

Page 714: ... 0 n Ramp up scaling 1 RmpUpScaling1 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 9999999 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the ramp up scaling 1 for the dual ramp function p29571 0 n Threshold speed 2 Thresh_2_Ramp Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be chan...

Page 715: ...p down scaling 2 for dual ramp function r29576 CO Ramp up scaling output RmpUpSca Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual output of the ramp up scaling r29577 CO Ramp down scaling output RmpDnSca Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoin...

Page 716: ...pe Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description Select the startup mode of deragging if the condition is met with selected mode deragging will perform when drive start to run then switch to user setpoint automatically Value 0 deragging disable 1 enabled on first run after power up 2 enabled on every ...

Page 717: ...d the time of duration P29597 are 0 reverse rotation will not perform in each cycle p29594 0 n Deragging ramp up time Derag rup Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 s Max 1000 00 s Factory setting 5 00 s Description Defines ramp time from 0 to forward reverse speed setpoint for derag...

Page 718: ... Factory setting 1 Description The number of the deragging cycle is repeated p29610 0 n Pipe filling enable PF En Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Enable the pipe filling function Value 0 The pipe filling function is disabled 1 The pipe filling function...

Page 719: ...ed when p29611 1 p29615 0 n Pipe filling monitoring time PF mon time Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 s Max 100 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Monitors the duration time for actual pressure r2272 the threshold p29614 The pipe filling stops if the duration time is reached...

Page 720: ... 100 000 Factory setting 30 000 Description Specifies the DC current as a percentage of rated current applied to the motor when condensation protection is active Dependency See also p29622 Note The change to the current becomes effective the next time condensation protection is active p29625 0 n Cavitation protection enable Cavi en Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U S...

Page 721: ...tion Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to enable inverter keep running operation This attempts to prevent the inverter from tripping by enabling all possible existing de rating features and the automatic restart function Note p29630 1 Sets the following parameter values to minimize likelihood of a trip p0290 2 inverter overload reaction reduce pulse ...

Page 722: ...ion Five correcponding flow values should be entered derived from the manufacturer s pump characteristic curve r29633 Flow meter calculated flow FlowM_calc flow Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min m h Max m h Factory setting m h Description The calculation result of flow meter r29640 0 18 CO BO Exte...

Page 723: ... Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for inputting the setpoint of the ramp function generator p29650 0 n DI selection for ON OFF2 DI sel ON OFF2 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Description Defines the DI selection for ON OFF2 After setting config...

Page 724: ... Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 722 0 Description Sets the signal source for the command ON OFF2 OFF2 r29659 CO BO Status word command Cmd stat Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Command ...

Page 725: ...osing single quotation mark 40 28 Opening parenthesis 41 29 Closing parenthesis 42 2A Asterisk 43 2B Plus 44 2C Comma 45 2D Hyphen minus 46 2E Period decimal point 47 2F Slash slant 0 48 30 Digit 0 9 57 39 Digit 9 58 3A Colon 59 3B Semicolon 60 3C Less than 61 3D Equals 62 3E Greater than 63 3F Question mark 64 40 Commercial At A 65 41 Capital Letter A Z 90 5A Capital letter Z 91 5B Opening bracke...

Page 726: ...ingle quotation mark a 97 61 Small letter a z 122 7A Small Letter z 123 7B Opening brace 124 7C Vertical line 125 7D Closing brace 126 7E Tilde Parameters 7 4 ASCII table SINAMICS G120XA converter 724 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 727: ...recommend that you additionally back up the settings on a storage medium outside the converter Without backup your settings could be lost if the converter develops a defect The following storage media are available for your settings Memory card Operator panel SINAMICS G120 Smart Access SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 725 ...

Page 728: ... are either not possible or only with some restrictions when using memory cards from other manufacturers Know how protection is only possible with one of the recommended memory cards In certain circumstances memory cards from other manufacturers do not support writing or reading data from to the converter 8 1 2 Saving setting on memory card Overview We recommend that you insert the memory card bef...

Page 729: ...mpletely loaded and damaged The converter cannot be operated with corrupt firmware Before inserting the memory card ascertain whether it also contains converter firmware Do not switch off converter power supply during an operating system update Firmware upgrade and downgrade Page 853 Note Accidental overwrite of the converter settings When the supply voltage is switched on the converter automatica...

Page 730: ... the memory card 6 2 6 9 1 3 U 6 21 1 Start data transfer with OK 72 5 G2Q Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the memory card You have backed up the settings of the converter to the memory card 8 1 3 Transferring the setting from the memory card 8 1 3 1 Automatic transfer Precondition The converter power supply has been switched off Saving the settings and series commissioning ...

Page 731: ...erring Precondition The converter power supply has been switched on No memory card is inserted in the converter Function description Procedure with the BOP 2 75 6 520 5 In the OPTIONS menu select FROM CRD 3 5 0 6 7 Set the number of your data backup You can back up 99 different settings on the memory card Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 1 Memory card SINAMICS G120XA converter Operat...

Page 732: ...on the memory card The data on the memory card are lost The memory card will only function again after formatting Only remove the memory card using the safe removal function Function description Procedure with the BOP 2 3 5 06 67 1 5 7 5 3 ැ 1 Set p9400 2 If a memory card is inserted p9400 1 3 3 2 The converter sets p9400 3 or p9400 100 p9400 3 You may remove the memory card from the converter p94...

Page 733: ... higher level control that a memory card is not inserted connect parameter r9401 to the send data of the fieldbus interface Deactivate message Procedure 1 Set p2118 x 1101 x 0 1 19 2 Set p2119 x 3 Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is deactivated Parameter Parameter Explanation Factory setting p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 0 ...

Page 734: ... data transfer with OK 6 9 1 3 U 6 3 Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the BOP 2 3 1 6 21 1 72 23 G2Q You have backed up the settings to the BOP 2 8 2 2 Transfer to the converter Precondition The converter power supply has been switched on Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 2 Operator panel SINAMICS G120XA converter 732 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E447...

Page 735: ...81 3 1 6 520 23 G2Q 4 Switch off the converter power supply 5 Wait until all converter LEDs are dark 6 Switch on the converter power supply again Your settings become active after switching on You have transferred the settings to the converter Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 2 Operator panel SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 733 ...

Page 736: ...e memory card you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting Additional information is available on the Internet Memory options http support automation siemens com WW view en 43512514 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 3 Other ways to back up settings SINAMICS G120XA converter 734 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 737: ...are version as the source converter Function description Procedure 1 Commission the first converter 2 Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium 3 Transfer the settings from the first converter to another converter via the data storage medium Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 4 Series commissioning SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019...

Page 738: ...el Acc_level p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter Drv comm par_filt p0124 0 n CU detection using LED CU detect LED p0970 Reset drive parameters Drive par reset p0971 Save parameters Sav par p0972 Drive unit reset Drv_unit reset p2111 Alarm counter Alarm counter p3950 Service parameter Serv par p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults Ackn DO faults p3985 Master control mode selection PcCtrl mod...

Page 739: ...aster fieldbus systems e g BACnet or Modbus RTU in spite of write protection being activated parameters can still be changed So that write protection is also active when accessing via these fieldbuses you must additionally set p7762 to 1 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 5 Write protection SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 737 ...

Page 740: ... memory card Recommended memory cards Page 726 Know how protection with extended copy pro tection Function description The active know how protection provides the following With just a few exceptions the values of all adjustable parameters p are invisible Several adjustable parameters can be read and changed when know how protection is active In addition you can define an exception list of adjusta...

Page 741: ...h basic copy protection After replacing a converter to be able to operate the new converter with the settings of the replaced converter without knowing the password the memory card must be inserted in the new converter Know how protection with extended copy protection It is not possible to insert and use the memory card in another converter without knowing the password Commissioning know how prote...

Page 742: ...e system of units Unit sys select p0595 Technological unit selection Tech unit select p0730 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 0 CU S_src DO 1 p0731 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 1 CU S_src DO 2 p0732 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 2 CU S_src DO 3 p0806 BI Inhibit master control Inhibit PcCtrl p0870 BI Close main contactor Close main cont p1080 0 n Minimum velocity v_min p1082 0 n Maxi...

Page 743: ...t reset the converter to the factory settings in order to be able to gain access to the converter adjustable parameters When restoring the factory settings you lose what you have configured in the converter and you must recommission the converter Parameter Parameter Description Factory setting p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 1 p7764 0 p7763 KHP OEM exception list p7766 is ...

Page 744: ... 0 19 KHP Control Unit serial number p7759 0 19 KHP Control Unit reference serial number r7760 Write protection know how protection status p7765 KHP configuration 0000 bin p7766 0 29 KHP password input p7767 0 29 KHP password new p7768 0 29 KHP password confirmation p7769 0 20 KHP memory card reference serial number r7843 0 20 Memory card serial number Saving the settings and series commissioning ...

Page 745: ...portant converter states Alarms and faults Every alarm and every fault has a unique number The converter signals alarms and faults via the following interfaces Fieldbus Terminal strip with the appropriate setting Interface to the BOP 2 or IOP 2 operator panel Interface to SINAMICS G120 Smart Access SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 743 ...

Page 746: ...ings A fault is active Firmware update is active Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware update Table 9 3 Fieldbuses via RS 485 interface BF Explanation Data exchange between the converter and control system is active The fieldbus is active however the converter is not receiving any process data RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously Converter...

Page 747: ... Firmware update is active Communication via Modbus or USS If the fieldbus monitoring is deactivated with p2040 0 the BF LED remains dark independent of the communication state Warnings faults and system messages 9 2 Operating states indicated on LEDs SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 745 ...

Page 748: ...ystem runtime comprises r2114 0 milliseconds and r2114 1 days System runtime r2114 1 days r2114 0 milliseconds If r2114 0 has reached a value of 86 400 000 ms 24 hours r2114 0 is set to the value 0 and the value of r2114 1 is increased by 1 Example Parameter Description r2114 0 System runtime ms r2114 1 System runtime days You cannot reset the system runtime Parameters Parameter Description Factor...

Page 749: ...INAMICS G120 Smart Access Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm Alarm buffer ROG QHZ ODUP FRGH ODUP YDOXH ODUP WLPH UHFHLYHG ODUP WLPH UHPRYHG D V D V U U U U U U U IORDW PV PV Figure 9 1 Alarm buffer The converter saves incoming alarms in the alarm buffer An alarm includes an alarm code an alarm value and two alarm times Alarm code r2122 Alarm value r2124 in fixed point format...

Page 750: ...etely full the converter will delete the oldest alarms 2 The converter moves the removed alarms from the alarm buffer to the now freed up positions of the alarm history Alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer 3 The converter closes gaps in the alarm buffer that occurred when the removed alarms were shifted in the alarm history by shifting the alarms that have not been removed ...

Page 751: ...Alarm time removed in days Table 9 5 Extended settings for alarms Parameter Description Factory setting You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 1 Further information is provided in the parameter list Warnings faults and system messages 9 4 Alarms alarm buffer and alarm history SINAM...

Page 752: ... Fault buffer 2OG 1HZ DXOW FRGH DXOW YDOXH DXOW WLPH UHFHLYHG DXOW WLPH UHPRYHG D V D V U U U U U U U IORDW PV PV Figure 9 3 Fault buffer The converter saves incoming faults in the fault buffer A fault includes a fault code a fault value and two fault times Fault code r0945 The fault code and fault value describe the cause of the fault Fault value r0949 in fixed point format I32 r2133 in floating ...

Page 753: ...e fault causes in the fault buffer has been removed and you acknowledge the faults the following takes place 1 The converter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history by eight indexes The converter deletes the faults that were saved in the indexes 56 63 before the acknowledgement 2 The converter copies the contents of the fault buffer to the memory locations 8 15 in the fault history...

Page 754: ...3 Fault time removed in days Extended settings for faults Parameter Description Factory setting p2100 0 19 Changing the fault reaction fault number 0 p2101 0 19 Changing the fault reaction reaction 0 p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 1 p2126 0 19 Changing the acknowledge mode fault number 0 p2127 0 19 Changing the acknowledge mode 1 Further informa...

Page 755: ...software error has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy evaluate fault buffer r0945 carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components if required check the data on the non volatile memory e g memory card upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support replace the Control Unit F01001 FloatingPoint exception Reaction...

Page 756: ... internal software error has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A memory area was accessed that does not return a READ...

Page 757: ...is defective xxxx 0092 hex 146 dec This SW or HW does not support the selected function xxxx 009C hex 156 dec Component with the specified component number is not available p7828 xxxx Additional values Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy Save a suitable firmware file or EEPROM file for upload or download in folder ee_sac on the memory card A01009 N CU Control module overtemperature Re...

Page 758: ...mware file incorrect r9926 Firmware check status A01017 Component lists changed Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause On the memory card one file in the directory SIEMENS SINAMICS DATA or ADDON SINAMICS DATA has been illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory No changes are permitted in this directory Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal zyx dec x Problem y Directory z File nam...

Page 759: ...internal RAM disk p9930 See also p9930 System logbook activation A01021 Removable data medium as USB data storage medium from the PC used Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The removable data medium is used as USB data storage medium from a PC As a consequence the drive cannot access the removable data medium When backing up the configuration data cannot be saved on the removable data medium Ala...

Page 760: ...e units to the referred representation type it is not permissible for any of the required reference parameters to be equal to 0 0 Fault value r0949 parameter Reference parameter whose value is 0 0 See also p0505 Selecting the system of units p0595 Technological unit selection Remedy Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0 0 See also p0304 p0305 p0310 p0596 p2000 p2001...

Page 761: ... parameters p0971 1 or copy RAM to ROM See also p0971 Save parameters F01036 A ACX Parameter back up file missing Reaction NONE OFF1 OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause When downloading the device parameterization a parameter back up file PSxxxyyy ACX associated with a drive object cannot be found Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Byte 1 yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy ACX yyy 000 consiste...

Page 762: ... one parameter back up file PSxxxyyy in the non volatile memory was unsuccessful in the directory USER SINAMICS DATA at least one parameter back up file PSxxxyyy has the read only file attribute and cannot be overwritten there is not sufficient free memory space available the non volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal dcba hex a yyy in the fil...

Page 763: ...ot be changed 2 Lower or upper value limit exceeded 3 Sub index incorrect 4 No array no sub index 5 Data type incorrect 6 Setting not permitted only resetting 7 Descriptive element cannot be changed 9 Descriptive data not available 11 No master control 15 No text array available 17 Task cannot be executed due to operating state 20 Illegal value 21 Response too long 22 Parameter address illegal 23 ...

Page 764: ...te any other messages signals and remove their cause boot from previously saved files switch off switch on or p0970 F01044 CU Descriptive data error Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non volatile memory Remedy Replace the memory card or Control Unit A01045 Configuring data invalid Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause An er...

Page 765: ...21005 DCC or r20005 FBLOCKS if necessary the assignment of the run time group p21000 p20000 can be changed in order to increase the sampling time r21001 r20001 if necessary reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks DCC and or function blocks FBLOCKS A01066 Buffer memory 70 fill level reached or exceeded Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The non volatile buffer memory for parameter chang...

Page 766: ...with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON if required withdraw the memory card and carry out POWER ON save the parameters p0971 1 F01072 Memory card restored from the backup copy Reaction NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The Control Unit was switched off while writing to the memory card This is why the visible...

Page 767: ... F01107 Save to memory card unsuccessful Reaction NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A data save to the memory card was not able to be successfully carried out Memory card defective insufficient space on memory card Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The file on the RAM was not able to be opened 2 The file on the RAM was not able to be read 3 A new directory could not be created on the memory c...

Page 768: ...edge POWER ON Cause Insufficient computation time Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy Contact Technical Support F01250 CU CU EEPROM incorrect read only data Reaction NONE OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause Error when reading the read only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Only for internal Siemens troublesho...

Page 769: ...y The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all read transfers 2yy The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all write transfers 3yy Cyclic communication is fully utilized 4yy The DRIVE CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application An additional dead time must be a...

Page 770: ...cle on a line all clock cycles of all drive objects in the previously mentioned parameters apply which have components on the line involved For fault value 9yy in addition check the clock cycles settings p0112 p0115 p4099 The lower the numerical value difference between two clock cycles the higher the lowest common multiple This behavior has a significantly stronger influence the higher the numeri...

Page 771: ...O input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different Example 1 BICO output with voltage normalized unit BICO input with current normalized unit BICO output and BICO input lie in different drive objects This means that the factor p2002 p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input p2002 contains the reference value for current p2001 contains the refer...

Page 772: ...cable routing for EMC compliance check whether an impermissible voltage is connected at one of the digital outputs check whether a digital output is loaded with an impermissible current upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support A01900 F PROFIBUS Configuration telegram error Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrec...

Page 773: ...us interface protocol selection A01945 PROFIBUS Connection to the Publisher failed Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause For PROFIBUS peer to peer data transfer the connection to at least one Publisher has failed Alarm value r2124 interpret binary Bit 0 1 Publisher with address in r2077 0 connection failed Bit 15 1 Publisher with address in r2077 15 connection failed Remedy Check the PROFIBUS cable...

Page 774: ...49 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support replace the Control Unit Note OA Open Architecture See also r4950 r4955 p4956 r4957 F02152 A OA Insufficient memory Reaction OFF1 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY POWER ON Cause Too many functions have been configu...

Page 775: ... monitoring for an analog input has responded The input value of the analog input has undershot the threshold value parameterized in p0761 0 3 p0756 0 Analog input 0 p0756 1 Analog input 1 p0756 2 Analog input 2 Fault value r0949 interpret decimal yxxx dec y analog input 0 analog input 0 AI 0 1 analog input 1 AI 1 2 analog input 2 AI 2 xxx component number p0151 Note For the following analog input...

Page 776: ...re heat sink AC inverter Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached The response is set using p0290 If the heat sink temperature exceeds the value set in p0292 0 then fault F30004 is output Remedy Check the following is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values have the load conditions and the load duty cycl...

Page 777: ...ched The response is set using p0290 If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K then fault F30037 is triggered Remedy Check the following is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned has the fan failed Check the direction of rotation has a phase of the line supply failed is an arm ...

Page 778: ... motor temperature has exceeded the fault threshold p0605 or a timer after the alarm threshold was exceeded p0604 has expired The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active The alarm is withdrawn if the response threshold for wire breakage or sensor not connected is exceeded R 2120 Ohm PTC or bimetallic NC contact The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and a t...

Page 779: ...re See also p0610 Motor overtemperature response Remedy set the response for motor overtemperature to Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max p0610 2 See also p0610 Motor overtemperature response A07015 Drive Motor temperature sensor alarm Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0601 With the fault the time in p0607 is started If the ...

Page 780: ...temperature p0601 Motor temperature sensor type p0607 Temperature sensor fault timer F07080 Drive Incorrect control parameter Reaction NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY POWER ON Cause The closed loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly e g p0356 L_spread 0 Fault value r0949 interpret decimal The fault value includes the parameter number involved See also p0310 p0311 p0341 p0344 p0350...

Page 781: ...DS dependent parameter 39 No index was set for an indexed parameter 41 A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN 42 A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation 43 Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful 51 Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE 61 The setting of a value was unsuccessfu...

Page 782: ...ted then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted See also p0100 IEC NEMA Standards p0505 Selecting the system of units p0595 Technological unit selection Remedy Check the adapted parameter values and if requir...

Page 783: ...Cause the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861 the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861 the line contactor dropped out during operation the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is switched off Remedy check the setting of p0860 check the feedback circuit from the line contactor increase the monitoring time in p0861 See also...

Page 784: ...mpts is displayed in r1214 increase the delay time in p1212 and or the monitoring time in p1213 either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit p0857 reduce the delay time to reset the start counter p1213 1 so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval A07321 Drive Automatic restart active Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The automatic restart AR is active When the ...

Page 785: ... A flying restart at speeds above 3000 rpm should be avoided A07352 Drive Limit switch signals not plausible Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Limit switch signals are not plausible Possible causes BICO interconnections are not OK p3342 p3343 sensors are not supplying a valid signal both supply a 0 signal Remedy check the BICO interconnections for the limit switch signals check the sensors See ...

Page 786: ...1280 Vdc controller configuration U f Remedy If the controller is not to intervene increase the ramp down times switch off the Vdc_max controller p1240 0 for vector control p1280 0 for U f control If the ramp down times are not to be changed use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit A07401 N Drive DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The Vdc_max con...

Page 787: ... Acknowledge NONE Cause The current limiting controller of the U f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded Remedy The alarm is automatically withdrawn after one of the following measures increase current limit p0640 reduce the load slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed F07410 Drive Current controller output limited Reaction OFF2 NONE OFF1 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause Th...

Page 788: ... fault cause 1 Quick magnetizing p1401 6 for soft starting p1401 0 2 Quick magnetizing for flux build up control p1401 2 3 Quick magnetizing p1401 6 for Rs identification after restart p0621 2 Remedy For fault cause 1 Shut down soft start p1401 0 0 Shut down quick magnetizing p1401 6 0 For fault cause 2 switch on flux build up control p1401 2 1 Shut down quick magnetizing p1401 6 0 For fault cause...

Page 789: ...ped p1141 An internal setting command of the ramp function generator output caused the set setpoint speed to be frozen Remedy deactivate the holding command for the ramp function generator p1141 suppress the fault p2101 p2119 This is necessary if the ramp function generator is held using jogging and the speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited r0898 6 F07436 A Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value limite...

Page 790: ...t settings to the actual value signal p11267 p11268 check the scaling of the actual value signal check the signal source setting for the actual value p11264 See also p11264 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value signal source p11267 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value upper limit p11268 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value lower limit A07444 PID autotuning is activated Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Automatic settin...

Page 791: ... current controller not correctly set U f operation Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high U f operation Short circuit in the motor cable or ground fault U f operation Motor current does not match current of power unit Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function p1200 Note Limit current 2 x minimum p0640 4 x p0305 x p0306 2 x p0305 x p0306 Remedy check the current limits p0...

Page 792: ...nit with a higher regenerative feedback capability for vector control the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced so that the fault is no longer triggered F07807 Drive Short circuit ground fault detected Reaction OFF2 NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A phase phase short circuit or ground fault was detected at the motor side output terminals of the converter Fault value r0949 interpret d...

Page 793: ... for External alarm 1 is satisfied Note The External alarm 1 is initiated by a 1 0 edge via binector input p2112 See also p2112 External alarm 1 Remedy Eliminate the causes of this alarm A07851 F External alarm 2 Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The condition for External alarm 2 is satisfied Note The External alarm 2 is initiated by a 1 0 edge via binector input p2116 See also p2116 External ...

Page 794: ...blocked Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan p2193 4 5 The monitoring function detects when the pump fan is blocked It is possible that the blocking torque threshold p2168 is set too low e g heavy duty starting See also p2165 p2168 p2181 p2193 Remedy check whether the pump fan is blocked and if blocked then resolve the problem check that the fan ...

Page 795: ...Drive Load monitoring pump fan no load condition Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan p2193 4 5 The monitoring function detects when the pump fan is operating under no load conditions The pump is running in the dry state no medium to be pumped or the fan has a broken belt It is possible that the detection torque threshold is...

Page 796: ...upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel F07902 N A Drive Motor stalled Reaction OFF2 IASC DCBRK NONE OFF1 OFF3 STOP2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The system has identified that the motor has stalled for a time longer than is set in p2178 Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 Reserved 2 Stall detection using r1408 12 p1745 or ...

Page 797: ...e NC contact opened Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal 11 No output current reduction 12 Output current reduction active See also p0604 Mot_temp_mod 2 sensor alarm threshold p0610 Motor overtemperature response Remedy check the motor load check the motor ambient temperature check KTY84 PT1000 check overtemperatures of the motor temperature model 2 p0626 p0628 See also p0612 p0617 p0618 p0619 p062...

Page 798: ...rresponding to the load F07924 Drive Torque speed too high Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause For p2193 1 The torque deviates from the torque speed envelope characteristic too high For p2193 2 The speed signal from the external encoder refer to p3230 deviates from the speed r2169 too high Remedy check the connection between the motor and load adapt the parameterization corr...

Page 799: ... braking set p1230 4 Braking current p1232 is injected until this binector input becomes inactive Remedy Not necessary The alarm automatically disappears once DC braking has been executed A07929 F Drive No motor detected Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The absolute current value is so small after enabling the inverter pulses that no motor is detected Note in the case of vector control and an ...

Page 800: ...ge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred during the Lq Ld measurement Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 10 Stage 1 The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low 12 Stage 1 The maximum current was exceeded 15 Second harmonic too low 16 Drive converter too small for the measuring technique 17 Abort due to pulse inhibit Remedy For fault value 10 Check whether the motor is corr...

Page 801: ...or p0325 When selecting p1980 1 Increase the value for p0329 Check whether the motor is correctly connected Replace the power unit involved For fault value 11 Increase the value for p0329 Check whether the motor is correctly connected Replace the power unit involved For fault value 12 When selecting p1980 4 Reduce the value for p0325 When selecting p1980 1 Reduce the value for p0329 Check whether ...

Page 802: ... enable signals See also r0002 Drive operating display r0046 Missing enable signal F07983 Drive Rotating measurement saturation characteristic Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The speed did not reach a steady state condition 2 The rotor flux did not reach a steady state c...

Page 803: ...sabled using p1959 1 See also p1959 Rotating measurement configuration F07984 Drive Speed controller optimization moment of inertia Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The speed did not reach a steady state condition 2 The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum ...

Page 804: ...alue 10 check the moment of inertia p0341 p0342 After the change Calculate p0340 3 For fault value 11 reduce the moment of inertia of the motor p0341 e g factor of 0 2 or increase e g factor of 5 and repeat the measurement Note The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959 2 See also p1959 Rotating measurement configuration F07985 Drive Speed controller optimization osci...

Page 805: ...easurement configuration F07986 Drive Rotating measurement ramp function generator Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause During the rotating measurements problems with the ramp function generator occurred Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The positive and negative directions are inhibited Remedy For fault value 1 Enable the direction p1110 or p1111 F07988 Drive Rotating measure...

Page 806: ... are referred to the rated motor impedance Zn Vmot nom sqrt 3 Imot nom Remedy For fault value 1 40 check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300 p0304 p0311 is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the power unit The ratio of the power unit to the rated motor current should not be less than 0 5 and not be greater than 4 check connection type s...

Page 807: ...Unit F08501 N A PROFINET Setpoint timeout Reaction OFF3 IASC DCBRK NONE OFF1 OFF2 STOP2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The reception of setpoints from PROFINET has been interrupted bus connection interrupted controller switched off controller set into the STOP state Remedy Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN if the error is repeated check the update time set in the bus configur...

Page 808: ...the PROFINET interface The currently set configuration has not been activated Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal 0 general consistency error 1 error in the IP configuration IP address subnet mask or standard gateway 2 Error in the station names 3 DHCP was not able to be activated as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists 4 a cyclic PROFINET connection is not possible as DHCP is activated Rem...

Page 809: ...NE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause An error occurred when attempting to activate the copy protection for the memory card Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 0 A memory card is not inserted 1 An invalid memory card is inserted not SIEMENS Note KHP Know How Protection Remedy insert a valid memory card Try to activate copy protection again p7765 See also p7765 KHP configuration F13102 Know how protecti...

Page 810: ... recognized Remedy check the motor data if required carry out commissioning check the motor circuit configuration star delta U f operation Increase up ramp U f operation Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit check the line supply quality reduce motor load correct connection of line reactor check the power cable connections check the power cables for short circuit or ground fau...

Page 811: ...ltage check the line supply phases See also p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage F30004 Power unit Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value insufficient cooling fan failure overload ambient temperature too high pulse frequency too high Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Te...

Page 812: ... whether a single phase load is distorting the line voltages Detune the resonant frequency with the line inductance by using an upstream line reactor Dampen the resonant frequency with the line inductance by switching over the DC link voltage compensation in the software see p1810 or increase the smoothing see p1806 However this can have a negative impact on the torque ripple at the motor output c...

Page 813: ...motor feeder cables increase the ramp up or ramp down time p1120 if the drive has stalled in U f control check the speed controller settings A30016 N Power unit Load supply switched off Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The DC link voltage is too low Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal DC link voltage at the time of trip 0 1 V Remedy Under certain circumstances the AC line supply is not switche...

Page 814: ...und fault monitoring thresholds F30022 Power unit Monitoring U_ce Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause In the power unit the monitoring of the collector emitter voltage U_ce of the semiconductor has responded Possible causes fiber optic cable interrupted power supply of the IGBT gating module missing short circuit at the power unit output defective semiconductor in the power unit Fault value r...

Page 815: ...ductor has exceeded the permissible limit value the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained insufficient cooling fan failure overload ambient temperature too high pulse frequency too high Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Temperature difference between the heat sink and chip 0 01 C Remedy adapt the load duty cycle check whether the fan is running check the fan elements check whether the a...

Page 816: ...dy for precharging 8 Precharging started DC link voltage less than the minimum switch on voltage 9 Precharging DC link voltage end of precharging still not detected 10 Wait for the end of the de bounce time of the main contactor after precharging has been completed 11 Precharging completed ready for pulse enable 12 Reserved xxxx Missing internal enable signals power unit inverted bit coded FFFF he...

Page 817: ...e permissible range Notice This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below A30031 Power unit Hardware current limiting in phase U Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Hardware current limit for phase U responded The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period closed loop control is incorrectly parameterized fault in the motor o...

Page 818: ...r cables exceed the maximum permissible length motor load too high power unit defective Note Alarm A30031 is always output if for a Power Module the hardware current limiting of phase U V or W responds Remedy check the motor data and if required recalculate the control parameters p0340 3 As an alternative run a motor data identification p1910 1 p1960 1 check the motor circuit configuration star de...

Page 819: ...he fan elements check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range Notice This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below F30037 Power unit Rectifier overtemperature Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit insufficient cooli...

Page 820: ... has been detected Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy check the motor holding brake for a short circuit check the connection and cable for the motor holding brake F30052 EEPROM data error Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause EEPROM data error of the power unit module Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 0 2 3 4 The EEPROM data read in from the p...

Page 821: ...s below the permissible minimum value Possible causes the power unit is being operated at an ambient temperature that lies below the permissible range the temperature sensor evaluation is defective Fault value r0949 interpret decimal inverter heat sink temperature 0 1 C Remedy ensure that higher ambient temperatures prevail replace the power unit F30071 No new actual values received from the Power...

Page 822: ...ntrol Unit For fault value 1 hex Carry out a POWER ON of the Control Unit F30075 Configuration of the power unit unsuccessful Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A communication error has occurred while configuring the power unit using the Control Unit The cause is not clear Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 0 The output filter initialization was unsuccessful 1 Activation deactivation of...

Page 823: ...ry out commissioning check the motor circuit configuration star delta U f operation Increase up ramp U f operation Check assignment of rated currents of motor and power unit check the power cable connections check the power cables for short circuit or ground fault check the length of the power cables replace power unit F30105 PU Actual value sensing fault Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Caus...

Page 824: ...ct Technical Support N30800 F Power unit Group signal Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge NONE Cause The power unit has detected at least one fault Remedy Evaluate the other messages that are presently available F30802 Power unit Time slice overflow Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A time slice overflow has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret decimal xx Time slice number xx Remedy carry out a PO...

Page 825: ...tch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support F30850 Power unit Internal software error Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause An internal software error has occurred in the power unit Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy replace power unit if required upgrade the firmware in the pow...

Page 826: ...t be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal Alarm number Note If required the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit Remedy replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version r0128 upg...

Page 827: ...lected telegram applies For p0922 999 the maximum interconnected PZD r2067 applies See also p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection r2067 PZD maximum interconnected F52960 Cavitation protection failure Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause Conditions exist for cavitation damage Cavitation damage is damage caused to a pump in pumping systems when the fluid is not flowing sufficiently This can...

Page 828: ...ion OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause All motors are under service or locked manually Remedy Repair or unlock set p29542 0 motors A52966 Mpc motor quantity not matched Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause p29521 and digital output settings do not match Remedy Change p29521 or digital output p0730 p0731 p0732 p0733 settings to ensure that the motor quantity set in p29521 matches with the quantity ...

Page 829: ... following persons to repair the converter Siemens customer service A repair center that has been authorized by Siemens Specialist personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual Only use original spare parts when carrying out repairs CAUTION Burns due to touching hot surfaces Certain components e g the heat sink or line reactor can b...

Page 830: ...ust not differ too much Ratio of the rated powers of the motor and the converter 1 4 WARNING Unexpected machine motion caused by incorrect inappropriate converter settings Replacing converters of different types can result in incomplete or incorrect inappropriate converter settings As a consequence unexpected machine motion e g speed oscillation overspeed or incorrect direction of rotation Unexpec...

Page 831: ...verter 7 Connect all of the cables to the converter NOTICE Damage from swapping the motor s connection lines The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the motor line Connect the three phases of the motor lines in the right order After replacing the converter check the direction in which the motor rotates 8 Reconnect the line voltage to the converter 9 The ...

Page 832: ...rator Panel onto the converter or connect the handheld device of the Operator Panel to the converter 8 Transfer the settings from the operator panel to the converter 9 Wait until the transfer is complete 10 After loading check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028 Alarm A01028 The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter Clear the alarm with p0971 1 and recommission the drive No ...

Page 833: ...4 Install the new converter 5 Connect all of the cables to the converter 6 Switch on the line voltage again 7 Recommission the drive Converter replacement has been completed once it has been commissioned Corrective maintenance 10 1 Replacing an converter SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 831 ...

Page 834: ...fact into consideration in special installation situations e g allow sufficient reserve regarding the cable length 10 2 2 Spare parts overview The look of the spare part can differ from the picture Spare parts Frame size Article number CU spare part kit consisting of 2 sets of labels 1 CU door 1 ESD cover 2 U clamps 1 functional grounding clamp 2 STO connectors 1 RS485 connector and 1 set of I O c...

Page 835: ...L3200 0SP06 0AA0 Current sensor FSH FSJ 6SL3200 0SE01 0AA0 FSJ 6SL3200 0SE02 0AA0 SITOP power supply for the external fan FSH FSJ 6EP3446 8SB00 0AY0 Fuse for the external fan FSH FSJ 6SY7000 0AC46 10 2 3 Fan units The average service life of the fan is 40 000 hours In practice however the service life may deviate from this value Especially a dusty environment can block up the fan The defective fan...

Page 836: ...converter power supply before replacing the fan unit WARNING Electric shock as a result of a residual charge in power components After the power supply has been switched off it takes up to 5 minutes until the capacitors in the converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non hazardous level Therefore touching the converter immediately after powering off can result in electric shoc...

Page 837: ...rom the converter as shown below 3 Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below By inserting the fan unit you have established the electrical connection between the converter and fan unit You have replaced the fan unit Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 835 ...

Page 838: ...erter as shown below Use a screwdriver if necessary 3 Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below By inserting the fan unit you have established the electrical connection between the converter and fan unit You have replaced the fan unit Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 836 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 839: ... and remove the lower cover of the converter 3 Disconnect the two cable lugs of fan power supply 4 Release the retaining screws four screws on FSH and eight screws on FSJ and draw out the fan unit s 5 Install the new fan unit s in the reverse sequence tightening torque for the fixing screws 3 Nm 26 5 lbf in You have replaced the fan unit s Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS...

Page 840: ...s Torque wrench for TX 25 screws Function description Removing the fan 1 Remove 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover 3 Remove the connector of the fan cable Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 838 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 841: ... plate by tightening the 4 plastic screws 2 Align the fan to the screw holes 3 Insert 2 screws TX 25 Tightening torque 3 Nm 4 Plug the connector 5 Install the front cover 6 Insert 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover Tightneing torque 3 Nm The fan is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 839 ...

Page 842: ...ff Required tools Torque wrench for the following screws TX 20 TX 25 Function description Removing the power supply board 1 Remove 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 840 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 843: ... power supply board to the screw holes 2 Insert 5 screws TX 20 Tightening torque 1 8 Nm 3 Plug the connectors onto the power supply board 4 Install the front cover 5 Insert 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover Tightneing torque 3 Nm The power supply board is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 841...

Page 844: ...ed tools Torque wrench for the following screws TX 20 TX 25 Function description Removing the FPI board 1 Remove the 2 screws torx 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 842 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 845: ...the IPD 5 Remove the 6 screws on the FPI board torx 20 7 7 7 1P 7 7 7 6 Remove the FPI board The FPI board is removed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 843 ...

Page 846: ... Nm 3 Plug the IPD 4 Plug the connectors onto the FPI board 5 Install the front cover 6 Insert 2 screws torx 25 of the front cover Tightneing torque 3 Nm The FPI board is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 844 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 847: ...r the following screws Hexagon 10 mm Hexagon 19 mm TX 20 TX 25 TX 30 Function description Removing the current sensor 1 Remove 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 845 ...

Page 848: ...e PE connect sheet metal Hexagon 10 mm PP PP 5 Remove the metal cover TX 20 and TX 30 7 7 7 6 Remove the metal cover TX 30 7 7 Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 846 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 849: ...t sensor cables 8 Remove the copper bar TX 30 7 7 7 9 Remove the copper bar TX 30 7 7 Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 847 ...

Page 850: ...copper bar TX 30 5 Plug the current sensor cables 6 Mount the metal cover TX 30 7 Mount the metal cover TX 20 and TX 30 8 Mount the PE connect sheet metal Hexagon 10 mm 9 Connect the power cables Hexagon 19 mm 10 Mount the front cover 11 Insert 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover The current sensor is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 848 Operating...

Page 851: ...rench for TX 20 screws Torque wrench for TX 25 screws Slot screwdriver 0 6 mm 3 5 mm Function description Removing the power supply 1 Remove 2 screws torx 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 849 ...

Page 852: ...5 of the front cover Tightneing torque 3 Nm The power supply board is installed 10 2 4 5 Replacing the fuse for the external fan Precondition The converter power supply is switched off Required tools Torque wrench for TX 20 screws Torque wrench for TX 25 screws Slot screwdriver 0 6 mm 3 5 mm Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 850 Operating Instructions 03 2...

Page 853: ...orx 25 of the front cover 7 7 1P 2 Remove the front cover 3 Disconnect the wires PP PP 4 Remove the fuse The fuse is removed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 851 ...

Page 854: ...ect the wires 3 Install the front cover 4 Insert 2 screws torx 25 of the front cover Tightneing torque 3 Nm The fuse is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120XA converter 852 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 855: ...RQFDUG YHUVLRQLQYHUWHU HV LUPZDUH GRZQJUDGH 7KH LQYHUWHU ORDGV WKH ILUPZDUH 7KH LQYHUWHU VLJQDOV DWD KDV EHHQ GRZQORDGHG IURP WKH PHPRU FDUG 1R 7KH LQYHUWHU LPSRUWV WKH GDWD EDFNXS IURP WKH PHPRU FDUG DWD EDFNXS DYDLODEOH RQ WKH PHPRU FDUG 1R HV 7KH LQYHUWHU VDYHV LWV GDWD ำ IDFWRU VHWWLQJ RQ WKH PHPRU FDUG User actions Converter response Figure 10 2 Overview of the firmware upgrade and firmware d...

Page 856: ...r PC 3 Transfer the unzipped files into the root directory of the memory card Figure 10 3 Example of memory card contents after the file transfer Depending on the firmware the filenames and the number of files may differ from the display above The USER directory does not exist on unused memory cards After the memory card is plugged in for the first time the converter creates a new USER directory Y...

Page 857: ...ly again 5 PLQ 5 The converter transfers the firmware from the memory card into its memory The transfer takes approximately 5 10 minutes While data is being transferred the LED RDY on the con verter stays red The LED BF flashes orange with a vari able frequency 6 At the end of the transfer the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red 0 5 Hz Power supply failure during transfer The converter firmware will b...

Page 858: ...from the memory card in step 9 9 Switch on the converter power supply again 5 10 If the firmware upgrade was successful after several seconds the converter LED RDY turns green If the memory card is still inserted depending on the previous content of the memory card one of the two following cases has occurred The memory card contains a data backup The converter has taken the settings from the memor...

Page 859: ...Switch on the converter power supply again 5 PLQ 5 The converter transfers the firmware from the memory card into its memory The transfer takes approximately 5 10 minutes While data is being transferred the LED RDY on the con verter stays red The LED BF flashes orange with a vari able frequency 6 At the end of the transfer the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red 0 5 Hz Power supply failure during tran...

Page 860: ...s still inserted depending on the previous content of the memory card one of the two following cases has occurred The memory card contains a data backup The converter has taken the settings from the memory card There was no data backup on the memory card The converter has the factory setting 11 If the memory card did not contain a data backup of the converter settings then you must transfer your s...

Page 861: ...he lit LED BF Function description You can check the following to correct an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade Have you correctly inserted the card Does the card contain the correct firmware Repeat the firmware upgrade or downgrade Corrective maintenance 10 3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 859 ...

Page 862: ...Corrective maintenance 10 3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade SINAMICS G120XA converter 860 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 863: ...voltage PNP NPN switchable Compatible to SIMATIC outputs 10 ms response time for debounce time p0724 0 Analog inputs 2 AI 0 AI 1 Single ended input 12 bit resolution 13 ms response time Switchable between voltage and current via parameter setting 10 0 V 10 V typical current drain 0 1 mA maximum voltage 35 V 0 mA 20 mA maximum voltage 10 V maximum current 80 mA If AI 0 and AI 1 are configured as su...

Page 864: ...ort circuit monitoring 20 Ω Overtemperature 1650 Ω KTY84 Short circuit monitoring 50 Ω Wire break 2120 Ω Pt1000 Short circuit monitoring 603 Ω Wire break 2120 Ω Bimetalic temperature switch with NC contact Memory card Slot for SD or MMC memory cards Recommended memory cards Page 726 Technical data 11 1 Technical data of inputs and outputs SINAMICS G120XA converter 862 Operating Instructions 03 201...

Page 865: ...tput current for a Low Overload load cycle LO base load power Rated power based on the LO base load overload output current If not specified otherwise the power and current data in the technical data always refer to a load cycle according to overload Permissible converter overload Rated overload is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s DVH ORDG IRU V RYHUORDG IRU V DVH ORDG 2 W V Note that the rat...

Page 866: ...base load power 100 kW FSH FSJ 4 kHz Degree of protection FSA FSH IP20 UL Open Type FSJ IP00 UL Open Type Short circuit current SCCR and branch protection Maximum permissible short circuit current 100 kA Minimum required short circuit current 18 kA The length of the connecting cable from the line to the converter may not reduce the minimum short circuit current Branch protection and short circuit ...

Page 867: ... 100 m s 10 x g 11 ms Vibration during product packaging Fc test according to EN 60068 2 64 30 min axis 3 axes 10 200 Hz ASD 1 0 m2 s3 Shock during product packaging Fc test according to EN 60068 2 27 10 x g 11 ms Protection against chemical sub stances Protected according to 3C2 to EN 60721 3 3 Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800 5 1 Sound pressure...

Page 868: ...0 306 0 31 7 2 7 7 15 28 5 31 0 387 0 402 7 2 7 7 FSD 18 5 41 37 0 54 0 54 16 2 17 9 22 46 43 0 63 0 64 16 2 17 9 30 56 58 0 92 0 93 16 2 17 9 37 73 68 0 97 0 98 18 4 19 1 45 84 82 5 1 26 1 27 16 6 18 3 FSE 55 106 103 1 56 1 57 27 27 FSF 75 143 136 1 72 1 74 60 3 66 8 90 164 164 2 16 2 18 60 3 66 8 110 200 201 2 27 2 29 64 68 3 132 234 237 2 86 2 89 64 68 3 FSG 160 278 289 3 66 105 200 348 364 4 5...

Page 869: ...on altitudes 2000 m above sea level it is permissible to connect the converter to any of the line supplies that are specified for it For installation altitudes 2000 m to 4000 m above sea level the following applies Connection to a TN line system with grounded neutral point is permissible TN systems with grounded line conductor are not permitted The TN line system with grounded neutral point can al...

Page 870: ...ELHQW WHPSHUDWXUH ഒ Permissible output current as a function of the ambient temperature FSH FSJ 2XWSXW FXUUHQW PELHQW WHPSHUDWXUH ഒ Note that Operator Panel can restrict the maximum permissible operating ambient temperature of the converter Technical data 11 5 Derating data SINAMICS G120XA converter 868 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 871: ... 86 8 500 925 895 100 95 3 91 7 85 8 560 1035 1015 100 95 8 92 7 87 5 11 5 4 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency FSA FSG converters Frame size Power rat ings kW Output current A at 40 C ambient temperature for a pulse frequency of 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz FSA 0 75 2 2 2 2 1 87 1 54 1 32 1 1 0 99 0 88 1 1 3 1 3 1 2 64 2 17 1 86 1 55 1 40 1 24 1 5 4 1 4 1...

Page 872: ... 82 73 8 65 6 110 201 141 101 80 4 132 237 166 119 94 8 FSG 160 277 194 139 111 200 348 244 174 139 250 436 305 218 174 FSH 315 590 472 355 645 516 400 725 580 FSJ 450 820 656 500 895 716 560 1015 812 The rated output currents in bold refer to the default pulse frequency at 40 C ambient temperature FSH FSJ converters In the factory setting the converter starts with a pulse frequency of 4 kHz and r...

Page 873: ...an output frequency 0 Hz Only operate the converter in the permissible operating range RQWLQXRXV RSHUDWLRQ 6SRUDGLF VKRUW WLPH GXW 6KRUW WLPH GXW 2XWSXW IUHTXHQF 3HUPLVVLEOH RXWSXW FXUUHQW ื V ื V ื V Continuous operation green area in the figure Operating state that is permissible for the complete operating time Short time duty yellow area in the figure Operating state that is permissible for les...

Page 874: ...ower loss in partial load operation in the Internet Partial load operation http support automation siemens com WW view en 94059311 Technical data 11 7 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation SINAMICS G120XA converter 872 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 875: ...ories Environments IEC EN 61800 3 makes a distinction between the first environment and second environment and defines different requirements for these environments First environment Residential buildings or locations at which the PDS is directly connected to a public low voltage supply without intermediate transformer Second environment An environment that includes all other establishments which ...

Page 876: ...peration in the second environment Category C3 The unfiltered converters FSA FSC with external line filters are suitble for operation in the second environment Category C3 The unfiltered converters FSD FSG with external line filters are suitble for operation in the second environment Category C3 With line reactor for FSH FSJ WARNING Use the device in the second environment This device is designed ...

Page 877: ... 2 Line supply with average relative short circuit power RSC 50 Uk 2 with line reactor Uk 2 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th 37 1 12 4 6 9 3 2 2 8 1 9 1 4 1 3 Line supply with low relative short circuit power RSC 15 Weak line supply Uk 6 with line reactor Uk 2 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th 22 4 7 3 1 2 5 1 3 1 0 8 0 7 Technical data 11 8 Electromagnetic compatibility of the converter ...

Page 878: ...quencies Line frequency 47 63 Hz Pulse frequency for example 4 8 16 kHz and multiples thereof assessed up to a maximum of 100 kHz 5 The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the documentation and use shielded motor cables EMC compliant setup of the machine or plant Pag...

Page 879: ...8 76 1 5 9 56 2 6 732 17 9 PLQ 63 9 92 7 287 U 3 1111 9 1 9 855 287 5 4 PLQ PLQ 9 PLQ PLQ 63 PLQ 5 03 1 0DF 3 U 59 33 1 Status display once the power supply for the converter has been switched on Figure A 1 Menu of the BOP 2 3URFHGXUH IRU VZLWFKLQJ WKH PRWRU RQ DQG RII YLD WKH RSHUDWRU SDQHO 6ZLWFK RQ PRWRU 6ZLWFK RII WKH PRWRU 3UHVV 0 18 872 0DVWHU FRQWURO RI WKH LQYHUWHU LV UHOHDVHG YLD WKH 23 Q...

Page 880: ...cedure 2 6 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 06 67 1 5 7 5 3 57 7 5 U 1 Select the menu to display and change parameters Press the OK key 2 Select the parameter filter using the arrow keys Press the OK key STANDARD The converter only displays the most important parameters EXPERT The converter displays all of the parameters 3 Select the required number of a write parameter using the arrow keys Press the OK key 4 S...

Page 881: ... values has its own index Procedure 2 2 3 U U U 3 3 1 Select the parameter number 2 Press the OK key 3 Set the parameter index 4 Press the OK key 5 Set the parameter value for the selected index You have now changed an indexed parameter Appendix A 1 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 879 ...

Page 882: ...ress the OK button You have now entered the parameter number directly Entering the parameter value directly The BOP 2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit Precondition The parameter value flashes in the BOP 2 display Procedure 3 V 6 2 2 1 Press the OK button for longer than five seconds 2 Change the parameter value digit by digit If you press the OK button then the BOP 2...

Page 883: ...parameter can only be adjusted during quick commissioning A parameter can only be adjusted when the motor is switched off 2 V U 5 21 2 V 3 3 9 2 V 3 5811 1 9 For each parameter the parameter list contains the operating state in which the parameter can be changed Appendix A 1 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 881 ...

Page 884: ...pplications using parameters You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block However the interconnection between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block with the appropriate outputs of another block The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized contrary to electric circuitry not using cables but in the software 0DLQ VHWSRLQW 0RWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU VHWSR...

Page 885: ... involve highly complex functions Example 1 Assign a different function to a digital input Example 2 Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology When interconnecting the signal the following principle applies Where does the signal come from An interconnection between two BICO blocks consists of a connector or a bine...

Page 886: ... siemens com cs ww en view 109752613 Operating the converter with the IOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Operating Instructions https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109758122 Operating the converter from a PC tablet or smartphone Protective devices https support industry siemens com cs cn en view 109762896 Overcurrent protection devices of the converter A 3 2 Configuring s...

Page 887: ...ion manual EMC compliant control cabinet design potential equalization and cable routing EMC installation guideline http support automation siemens com WW view en 60612658 Appendix A 3 Manuals and technical support SINAMICS G120XA converter Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB 885 ...

Page 888: ...cts you use The Knowledge Manager Intelligent Search helps you find the documents you need Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the Forum You can find your local representative for Automation Drives via our contact database under Contact Partner Information about local service repair spare parts and much more can be found under Services Appendix A 3 M...

Page 889: ...63 582 Alarm counter p2111 579 Alarm history 748 Alarm number r2110 0 63 579 Alarm time 270 747 Alarm time received in days r2145 0 63 589 Alarm time received in milliseconds r2123 0 63 582 Alarm time removed in days r2146 0 63 589 Alarm time removed in milliseconds r2125 0 63 583 Alarm value 747 r2124 0 63 583 Alarm value for float values r2134 0 63 586 Alert A01009 N 755 A01016 F 756 A01017 756 ...

Page 890: ...02 821 A30810 F 823 A30920 F 824 A30999 F N 824 A50010 F 824 A50011 F 825 A52961 825 A52962 825 A52963 825 A52964 826 A52966 826 F01000 753 F01001 753 F01002 754 F01003 754 F01005 755 F01010 755 F01015 755 F01018 756 F01023 757 F01030 758 F01033 758 F01034 758 F01036 A 759 F01038 A 759 F01039 A 760 F01040 760 F01042 761 F01043 761 F01044 762 F01054 763 F01068 764 F01072 764 F01105 A 765 F01107 765...

Page 891: ...7950 A 798 F07967 798 F07968 798 F07969 798 F07983 800 F07984 801 F07985 802 F07986 803 F07988 803 F07990 803 F08010 N A 805 F08501 N A 805 F08502 A 805 F13009 806 F13100 806 F13101 807 F13102 807 F30001 808 F30002 808 F30003 809 F30004 809 F30005 809 F30011 810 F30012 810 F30013 810 F30015 N A 811 F30017 811 F30021 812 F30022 812 F30024 812 F30025 813 F30027 813 F30035 816 F30036 817 F30037 817 F...

Page 892: ... 568 BI Binector connector converter status word 3 p2082 0 15 569 BI Binector connector converter status word 4 p2083 0 15 569 BI Binector connector converter status word 5 p2084 0 15 570 BI Bypass control command p1266 503 BI Bypass switch feedback signal p1269 0 1 504 BI Close main contactor p0870 454 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 0 p0810 445 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 1 p0811...

Page 893: ... p3343 0 n 649 BI Limit switch plus p3342 0 n 649 BI Limit switch start p3340 0 n 648 BI Line contactor feedback signal p0860 452 BI Load monitoring failure detection p3232 0 n 643 BI Motor stall monitoring enable negated p2144 0 n 588 BI Motorized potentiometer accept setting value p1043 0 n 470 BI Motorized potentiometer inversion p1039 0 n 469 BI Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint p1036 0 n...

Page 894: ...1 0 15 572 BO PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit serial r2092 0 15 573 BO PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit serial r2093 0 15 573 BO RTC DTC1 output r8413 0 1 675 BO RTC DTC2 output r8423 0 1 677 BO RTC DTC3 output r8433 0 1 679 BO STW1 from IOP in the manual mode r8540 0 15 679 BOP 2 Menu 877 Symbols 877 Braking functions 296 Braking method 295 Bus termination 77 78 Bypass 332 Bypass changeover source configu...

Page 895: ...caling p1071 0 n 474 CI Minimum speed signal source p1106 0 n 480 CI Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint p1042 0 n 470 CI Motorized potentiometer setting value p1044 0 n 470 CI PROFIdrive PZD send double word p2061 0 15 565 CI PROFIdrive PZD send word p2051 0 16 563 CI Ramp down scaling input p29579 0 n 714 CI Ramp function generator ramp down time scaling p1139 0 n 486 CI Ramp function gen...

Page 896: ...628 Closed loop cascade control switch in threshold p2373 628 Closed loop cascade control switch in switch out speed p2378 629 Closed loop cascade control switch out delay p2375 629 Closed loop cascade control switch out sequence p2383 631 CO BO 2 3 wire control control word r3333 0 3 648 CO BO Bypass control status word r1261 0 11 502 CO BO Closed loop cascade control status word r2379 0 7 630 CO...

Page 897: ...8 4 12 601 CO BO Status word monitoring 3 r2199 0 5 602 CO BO Status word sequence control r0899 0 11 455 CO BO Status word speed controller r1407 0 23 519 CO BO Status word closed loop control r0056 0 15 369 CO BO Status word application r29629 719 CO BO Status word command r29659 722 CO BO Supplementary control word r0055 0 15 367 368 CO BO Technology controller fixed value selection status word...

Page 898: ...p1009 0 n 463 CO Fixed speed setpoint effective r1024 467 CO Fixed value 1 p2900 0 n 635 CO Fixed value 2 p2901 0 n 636 CO Fixed value M Nm p2930 0 n 636 CO Fixed values r2902 0 14 636 CO Flux setpoint p1570 0 n 528 529 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value after limiter r11072 689 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum p11091 690 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum p11092 690 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal r1...

Page 899: ...tpoint sum r1170 488 CO Speed controller speed setpoint r1438 520 CO Speed controller system deviation r0064 370 CO Speed limit in negative direction of rotation p1086 0 n 477 CO Speed limit in positive direction of rotation p1083 0 n 477 CO Speed limit negative effective r1087 478 CO Speed limit positive effective r1084 477 CO Speed setpoint after the filter r0062 370 CO Speed setpoint before the...

Page 900: ...5 CO Torque limit lower without offset r1527 526 CO Torque limit upper p1520 0 n 524 CO Torque limit upper without offset r1526 526 CO Torque limit upper motoring scaling p1524 0 n 525 CO Torque setpoint r0079 373 CO Torque setpoint before supplementary torque r1508 523 CO Total flux setpoint r1598 531 CO Total setpoint effective r1078 475 CO Upper effective torque limit r1538 527 CO Vdc controlle...

Page 901: ...41 CU digital inputs terminal actual value r0721 426 CU digital outputs status r0747 430 CU invert digital outputs p0748 431 CU number of inputs and outputs r0720 0 4 426 Current injection ramp time p1601 0 n 532 Current limit p0640 0 n 424 Current limit excitation induction motor p0644 0 n 425 Current limit torque generating total r1533 527 Current setpoint smoothing time p1616 0 n 533 Current th...

Page 902: ...2 Drive unit line supply voltage p0210 381 Drive unit reset p0972 459 Drive unit status word r3974 659 DTC Digital Time Clock 272 Dual ramp 245 E Efficiency optimization p1580 0 n 530 531 Efficiency optimization 2 maximum flux limit value p3316 0 n 644 Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value p3315 0 n 644 Efficiency optimization 2 optimum flux r3313 644 EMC 39 Enable PID autotuning p235...

Page 903: ...24 0 2 557 Fieldbus interfaces 77 78 Filter time constant Vdc correction p1806 0 n 538 Firmware check status r9926 684 Firmware downgrade 857 Firmware file incorrect r9925 0 99 684 Fixed speed setpoint select mode p1016 465 Flow control 247 Flow meter calculated flow r29633 720 Flow meter pump flow p29632 0 4 720 Flow meter pump power p29631 0 4 720 Fluid flow machine power point 1 p3320 0 n 644 F...

Page 904: ...alue smoothing time constant p11165 695 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value upper limit p11167 695 Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant p11174 696 Free tec_ctrl 1 integral time p11185 697 Free tec_ctrl 1 limit ramp up ramp down time p11193 697 Free tec_ctrl 1 proportional gain p11180 696 Free tec_ctrl 1 sampling time p11128 693 Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint ramp down time p11158 694 Free tec_ctrl 1 s...

Page 905: ...44 516 I_max frequency controller integral time p1341 0 n 516 I_max frequency controller proportional gain p1340 0 n 515 I_max voltage controller integral time p1346 0 n 517 I_max voltage controller proportional gain p1345 0 n 516 i2t monitoring 304 I2t motor model thermal time constant p0611 0 n 418 Identification final display r3925 0 n 656 Identification stator resistance after restart p0621 0 ...

Page 906: ...hreshold 1 lower p2186 0 n 598 Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper p2185 0 n 598 Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower p2188 0 n 599 Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper p2187 0 n 598 Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower p2190 0 n 599 Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper p2189 0 n 599 Load monitoring torque threshold no load p2191 0 n 599 M Macro drive object r8570 0 39 681 Mac...

Page 907: ... time p0347 0 n 401 Motor excitation build up time p0346 0 n 400 Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after switching on again p0622 0 n 422 Motor magnetizing inductance p0360 0 n 404 Motor model adaptation configuration p1780 0 n 536 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation p1755 0 n 535 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation p1756 536 Motor model configuration p175...

Page 908: ... p29527 708 Multi pump control maximum time for continuous operation p29531 709 Multi pump control motor configuration p29521 706 Multi pump control motor selection mode p29522 706 Multi pump control overcontrol threshold p29526 707 Multi pump control pump switchover enable p29539 710 Multi pump control service mode enable p29540 710 Multi pump control switch in delay p29524 707 Multi pump control...

Page 909: ... 247 Pipe filling 216 Pipe filling enable p29610 0 n 716 Pipe filling mode p29611 0 n 716 Pipe filling monitoring time p29615 0 n 717 Pipe filling speed p29612 0 n 717 Pipe filling threshold p29614 0 n 717 Pipe filling time p29613 0 n 717 PM330 digital inputs simulation mode p4095 661 PM330 digital inputs simulation mode setpoint p4096 661 PM330 digital outputs status r4047 661 PolID circle center...

Page 910: ...nction generator ramp up time p1120 0 n 481 482 Ramp function generator rounding off type p1134 0 n 484 Ramp up scaling 1 p29570 0 n 712 Ramp up scaling 2 p29572 0 n 712 Ramp up time 244 Rated motor current p0305 0 n 390 Rated motor efficiency p0309 0 n 392 Rated motor frequency p0310 0 n 392 393 Rated motor power p0307 0 n 391 r0394 0 n 404 Rated motor power factor p0308 0 n 392 r0332 0 n 397 Rat...

Page 911: ... referred to p0514 0 p0515 0 19 410 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 1 p0516 0 19 410 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 2 p0517 0 19 410 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 3 p0518 0 19 410 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 4 p0519 0 19 411 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 5 p0520 0 19 411 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 6 p...

Page 912: ...2390 0 n 632 Speed threshold 1 p2141 0 n 588 Speed threshold 2 p2155 0 n 591 Speed threshold 3 p2161 0 n 591 Speed threshold 4 p2163 0 n 592 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor p1967 550 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual r1968 550 Speed_ctrl_opt speed p1965 549 Square law characteristic 276 285 Standards EN 61800 3 28 Star connection Y 76 Starting behavior Optimization 286 Starting behavior Optimizat...

Page 913: ...51 610 Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration p2230 0 n 607 Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value p2237 0 n 609 Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value p2238 0 n 609 Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp down time p2248 0 n 610 Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp up time p2247 0 n 610 Technology controller m...

Page 914: ...ime Coordinated 270 V V f characteristic 274 Vdc controller configuration p1281 0 n 505 Vdc controller configuration U f p1280 0 n 505 Vdc controller configuration vector control p1240 0 n 497 Vdc controller integral time p1251 0 n 500 Vdc controller integral time U f p1291 0 n 508 Vdc controller proportional gain p1250 0 n 500 Vdc controller proportional gain U f p1290 0 n 507 Vdc controller rate...

Page 915: ...control 294 Sensorless 288 Voltage boost 274 279 284 286 Voltage boost total r1315 513 Voltage limiting p1331 0 n 513 Voltage measurement configuring p0247 384 Voltage reserve dynamic p1574 0 n 529 W Wire break monitoring 143 305 306 Write protection 736 p7761 666 Write protection multi master fieldbus system access behavior p7762 666 Z Zero speed detection monitoring time p1227 494 Ziegler Nichol...

Page 916: ...Index SINAMICS G120XA converter 914 Operating Instructions 03 2019 FW V1 0 A5E44751205B AB ...

Page 917: ......

Page 918: ...many Further information SINAMICS converters Scan the QR code for additional information about SINAMICS G120 www siemens com sinamics Siemens AG Digital Factory Motion Control Postfach 3180 91050 ERLANGEN ...

Reviews:

No comments